Home

PCNC1100 User Manual - Website & Collaboration Services

1. USB jogging ei pendant LCD Ah A Screen Jq 4 Z Keyboard 3 ae a oe ers 2 1 Elin Personal ar computer computer Figure 2 2 Computer and display Using Tormach PCNC 1100 2 2 30625 Rev C3 1 Preparation to avoid errors when doing tool changes during a job Computer Mounting Arrangement Keep the computer in a clean location preferably inside the stand of the milling machine Resist the temptation to expose the computer in any way Providing access to floppy disks CDs or direct computer controls will also open the computer to contamination and risk Tormach offers accessories that will allow you to operate the system without exposing your computer While there are many possible configurations for your machine control computer we suggest the following figure 2 2 1 USB bulkhead panel mount cable This allows you to mount a USB socket directly on the side of the cabinet You can use a standard USB flash drive to transfer G code programs and other files to the machine controller This is Tormach PN 30278 USB bulkhead mount
2. C134 Run Code Program File G90G80G49 GO Z20 0000 1000 GO Z20 GO X2 521 Ye 0343 M3 1239 000 G1 0 0000 1239 000 G2 X2 5087 Y3 6823 13 2919 G1 X2 5087 Y6 6988 G2 X2 852 1 Y7 3468 13 2919 J6 6988 G1 X3 8022 Y7 3468 G2 X4 1456 Y6 6988 13 3623 J6 6988 ae G1 X4 1456 Y5 7764 G3 X4 4890 Y5 ae 14 9288 J5 7764 G1 X5 5160 Y5 1284 G3 X5 8594 Y5 7764 M amp G Code Program File a Standard Text Editor Computer ON hard disc R Microsoft Notepad PCNC 1100 Wizards Conversational Programming DXF HPGL JPG File Conversions ae CAM Program Methods to Create Program Files Figure 4 1 Schematic on how to generate part programs The PCNC is always controlled by commands in a part program Most of these are G codes although many other letters are used to define the details like the spindle speed feed rate etc which are required Thus a part program is sometimes referred to as a G code program Movement of the machine axes is controlled by three different G codes 30635 Rev C3 1 4 1 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 4 2 4 3 From an Idea to a part e G00 moves at the maximum speed of the machine so is used when no cutting is required e GOI moves in a straight line between two points at the set feed rate e G02 and G03 move in a circular arc between two points in a plane and possib
3. e Oe CC il DC BUS BOARD 30661 O MM Connection Board N UTO MA sw4 L J3 1 a START sw3 J3 14 X LIMIT Y LIMIT Z UPPER Z LOWER COMPUTER a Lis_y _J J3 13 l atop SW2 329 328 STOP C1 Lay J3 3 A W1 Z DRIVE Y DRIVE X DRIVE FWD REV PW 30589 307 L J J3 4 Brake Wires J6 1 thru J6 6 J6 13 thru J6 18 J6 6 thru J6 12 More detail can be seen by viewing this document on a computer screen as a PDF file Tools and Related Items 30485 Spanner Wrench 25 28 mm DIN 1804 applications DIN 1810 form A standard Used for setting preload on ballscrew mount bearings Two wrenches are needed Optical Tachometer 100 000 RPM laser optical tachometer 5 digit digital display 30527 l R Useful for spindle speed calibration Includes case 30625 PCNC 1100 Manual Replace your old manual with the latest version Spiral bound Manual PDF can also be downloaded from www tormach com Touch Up Paint Dark Gray 2 5 oz matching the lower section of the stand Original 30572 A i paint is oil based touchup is latex Touch Up Paint Light Gray 2 5 oz matching the PCNC 1100 and the upper section of the stand Original paint is oil based touchup is latex DIN connector 5 pin This is a plug that will fit in the accessory jack on the front of the machine cabinet 30712 Machine Stand Door latch Left 30713 Machine Stand Stand Door l
4. cocooccconcnnconcnnoncnnnnnnoss 7 3 Excecution of words O Oia tien 7 31 Exploded view base Assembly nice 5 column and head assembly coooccccocccnonccnno 3 Expressions denne ian e 7 7 F Po W Ord sIeCd AA NN 7 31 Feed amp peca calculator adds 5 15 Feed and speed override controlled by M48 M49 oooooccccncocccncconccnnonnno 7 29 Feedrate eT EE E E E E E ATS 7 2 display DROs Ue SCP IDC o POP E a nena tee 5 9 A e E E 7 31 inverse Ume at eiii 7 27 units per minute G94 ocoocccnnnnccnnnniccnnnnanonos 7 27 units DEE LOY eoan a ane 5 9 A 7 27 Feedrate control family A A O E 5 9 Feedrate override DRO A A E EA nae 5 9 Feedrate units per rev G95 ou eeceeseeeeneeeees 7 27 A 5 12 First part MA ill i 3 1 Eixino tostada idas 2 6 Fixture coordinate select G4 GIN CINCO strain ardido 7 21 Fixture coordinate systems setting G10 7 15 Fourth axis diameter compensation of feedrate 8 1 engraving on a Cylinder coooccccooccncnccnnoncnnnnno 8 2 Beak cuina idisilas 8 2 referencing and Zeroing iseia 8 1 F ourth ax1s on PCNU inicias 8 1 From idea to a Dalt coooncnccccnnonccnnnonnnoncnnnnnnnnononnnns 4 1 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 Appendices G G amp M codes OVINE W ri OO O T 4 1 GOO rapid linear Motion ccccooccncnccncnonnnononnnnno 7 11 GOL linear feedrate MOVE escusa daciss 7 13 OZ aClock WISE O ai 7 13 G03 counterclockwise arC ooc
5. diameter 2 flute cutter at around 18 IPM inches per minute and 3000 RPM using a full depth of cut that is a pretty good volumetric rate of metal removal so it is essential to clear chips with a flood coolant We will run smaller cutters when we are not trying to remove large amounts in a hurry For most aluminium work we use 3 3 The example above using a 14 cutter results in a surface speed of 390 SFM surface feed per minute a s cutter needs 4000 RPM to get the same surface speed well within the performance envelope of the machine Cutting steel and iron needs a lower volumetric rate thus slower feed and speed The PCNC 1100 will run best using smaller cutters when working with tougher materials For example the general machining recommendation for some oil hardening steels is 30 SFM Doing this with a end mill the surface speed calculation indicates 230 RPM but that is below the minimum spindle speed of the PCNC 1100 By switching to a end mill the recommended spindle speed becomes 460 RPM well within the capability of the PCNC 1100 By keeping close to general machining recommendations your tools will last longer and you will have a better cut 30635 Rev C3 1 1 3 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 Preface 1 3 2 Understanding Accuracy While a machine tool may seem absolutely rigid the truth of the matter is that everything has some elasticity Related to elasticity is the compressibility of components such as ba
6. and division There are three logical operations non exclusive or OR exclusive or XOR and logical and AND The eighth operation is the modulus operation MOD The ninth operation is the power operation of raising the number on the left of the operation to the power on the right The binary operations are divided into three groups The first group is power The second group is multiplication division and modulus The third group 1s addition subtraction logical non exclusive or logical exclusive or and logical If operations are strung together for example in the expression 2 0 3 1 5 5 5 11 0 operations in the first group are to be performed before operations in the second group and operations in the second group before operations in the third group If an expression contains more than one operation from the same group such as the first and in the example the operation on the left is performed first Thus the example is equivalent to 2 0 3 1 5 5 5 11 0 which simplifies to 1 0 0 5 whichis 0 5 The logical operations and modulus are to be performed on any real numbers not just on integers The number zero 1s equivalent to logical false and any non zero number is equivalent to logical true Unary Operation Value A unary operation value is either ATAN followed by one expression divided by another expression for example ATAN 2 1 3 or any other unary operation name followed by an expre
7. 8 1 3 1 8 1 3 2 Machine upgrades and configuration Engraving on a Periphery of a Cylinder If you can engrave in X Y with a Wizard or CAD CAM software then it is easy to adapt an X Y part program to use the fourth axis figure 8 1 The rotary table is mounted with its axis parallel to the X axis The work to be engraved is mounted on a mandrel supported by the tailstock It is of course important that it runs true or the depth of the engraving will be uneven The engraving is prepared as if it to be engraved in the X direction 1 e the height of the letters is movement of Y The code may not use G02 or G03 arc commands There are then three stages in engraving on the cylinder a the part program is converted to be motion in A and X instead of X and Y b the A motion is scaled to convert it to degrees and c the radius of the cylinder is defined to ensure the correct feed rate on the surface being engraved Editing the Part program E j Scale D Z O O Load the X Y engraving part program for 1 0000 _Zero your text Click the Edit button in the file control family Use the Replace function of scale O A f O O the edit to change all instances of X to A 47 360 Zero and then all instances of Y to X This TE Mac orients the engraving figure 8 1 1 2100 Scaling the Width of the Text n A A 88s rhe kT The original part program will move along Figur
8. NZ90 GSL X ELOZL 41005 probe x side of hole N300 1041 1031 2000 2 0 find very good X value of hole center N310 1024 1031 2000 2 41004 find hole diameter in X direction N320 1034 1014 1024 2 0 find average hole diameter N330 1035 1024 1014 find difference in hole diameters N340 GO X 1041 Y 1022 back to center of hole N350 M2 that s all folks In the above code an entry of the form lt description of a number gt is meant to be replaced by an actual number that matches the description of number After this section of code has executed the X value of the center will be in parameter 1041 the Y value of the center in parameter 1022 and the diameter in parameter 1034 In addition the diameter parallel to the X axis will be in parameter 1024 the diameter parallel to the Y axis in parameter 1014 and the difference an indicator of circularity in parameter 1035 The probe tip will be in the hole at the XY center of the hole The example does not include a tool change to put a probe in the spindle Add the tool change code at the beginning if needed 7 7 13 Cutter Radius Compensation G40 G41 and G42 To turn cutter radius compensation off program G40 It is OK to turn compensation off when it is already off Cutter radius compensation may be performed only if the X Y plane is active To turn cutter radius compensation on left 1 e the cutter stays to the left of the
9. Programming language reference number may be zero an offset value of zero will be used Omitting H has the same effect as a zero value G44 is provided for compatibility and is used 1f entries in the table give negative offsets It is an error if the H number is not an integer is negative or is larger than the number of carousel slots To use no tool length offset program G49 It is OK to program using the same offset already in use It is also OK to program using no tool length offset if none is currently being used It is strongly advised to put the G43 command on the same line block as the T and the M06 which actually implements the change If this is done then the control software anticipates the new offset during the time the operator has control for changing the tool The operator can change the work Z offset safely if this condition is met 7 7 15 Scale Factors G50 and G51 To define a scale factor which will be applied to an X Y Z A I amp J word before it is used program G51 X Y Z A where the X Y Z etc words are the scale factors for the given axes These values are of course never themselves scaled It is not permitted to use unequal scale factors to produce elliptical arcs with G2 or G3 To reset the scale factors of all axes to 1 0 program G50 7 7 16 Temporary Coordinate System Offset G52 To offset the current point by a given positive or negative distance without motion program G5
10. The probe explores using the three moves shown on the screen panel figure 8 12 Move establishes the rough position of the jaw Move 2 near the far end establishes the angle the vise is mounted at and displays it in the DRO Move 3 approaches the end of the jaw along a 4 Jaw width inches Figure 8 12 Vise jaw corner perpendicular The X Y origin of the current work offsets is then set to the calculated position of the corner and the probe moves to its starting point The angle DRO gives you a confidence check the setup accuracy of your vise If it is a long way from 0 0 degrees then Move 2 might not find the jaw or might even hit the moving jaw If you need to work with a significantly skewed vise or to very close tolerances then the Comprehensive X Y probing screen has features that will help Notes for all operations You can use these operations with a part program loaded or indeed with one partly run say to an optional stop The probing will however set the Control Software to Absolute Coordinates G90 No rotation G69 No axis scaling G50 and cancel canned cycles G80 Z Probing Figure 8 13 shows the Z probing screen It has two distinct functions depending on whether the probe is in the spindle or a normal tool is in the spindle and the tool setter is connected to the Using Tormach PCNC 1100 16 xj Eje Config View Wizerds Creracor Help Mi gt G15 G10 G17 G40 G20 G90 G3
11. This section defines the language G codes etc that are understood and interpreted by the Control Software This chapter 1s intended for reference purposes If you want to learn about the principles of the control language so you can write programs by hand from first principles then you should consult an introductory textbook on G code programming 7 1 Definitions 7 1 1 Control Software This 1s the term used for the program running under Microsoft Windows in the PC connected to your PNC 1100 In this chapter the Control Software 1s shortened to the CS 7 1 2 Linear Axes The X Y and Z axes form a standard right handed coordinate system of orthogonal linear axes Positions of the three linear motion mechanisms are expressed using coordinates on these axes 7 1 3 Rotational Axes The rotational axes are measured in degrees as wrapped linear axes in which the direction of positive rotation is counterclockwise when viewed from the positive end of the corresponding X Y or Z axis By wrapped linear axis we mean one on which the angular position increases without limit goes towards plus infinity as the axis turns counterclockwise and decreases without limit goes towards minus infinity as the axis turns clockwise Wrapped linear axes are used regardless of whether or not there is a mechanical limit on rotation Clockwise or counterclockwise is from the point of view of the workpiece If the workpiece is fastened to a t
12. G83 Z 0 6 G1 Y20 lf 20 degrees LEO G1 Y30 G1 Y40 FP a ie 6 Crier tev G15 back to normal Cartesian Note 1 You must not make X or Y moves other than by using GO or G1 when G16 is active 2 This G16 is different to a Fanuc implementation in that it uses the current point as the polar center The Fanuc version requires a lot of origin shifting to get the desired result for any circle not centered on 0 0 7 7 8 Plane Selection G17 G18 and G19 Program G17 to select the X Y plane G18 to select the XZ plane or G19 to select the YZ plane The effects of having a plane selected are discussed in under G2 3 and Canned cycles Using Tormach PCNC 1100 7 16 30625 Rev C3 1 7 7 9 7 7 10 7 7 11 7 7 12 7 7 12 1 Programming language reference Length Units G20 and G21 Program G20 to use inches for length units and program G21 to use millimeters It is usually a good idea to program either G20 or G21 near the beginning of a program before any motion occurs and not to use either one anywhere else in the program It is the responsibility of the user to be sure all numbers are appropriate for use with the current length units Return to Home G28 and G30 A home position is defined by parameters 5161 5166 The parameter values are in terms of the absolute coordinate system but are in unspecified length units To return to home position by way of the programmed position program G28 X Y Z A or use G3
13. button exe Mach3Scre and choose the machine profile you wish Figure 9 11 Opening the profile to modify figure 9 11 The profile for the PCNC3 is C PCNC3 PCNC M3 xml 7 Next under the Speed Calibration heading enter both of the measurements you recorded earlier You will enter the Volts on MANUAL measurement in the first box You will enter the Volts on AUTO measurement in the second box figure 9 12 8 At this point you should click the Save Profile button If you are sure all the information is correct click the Done button Close the XML Tweak software program 9 Open the PCNC control software program again and confirm that the computer is calibrated with the machine by repeating step 5 from above If the voltage falls between 4 57V 4 77V then it is within tolerance and is calibrated correctly If not start this procedure over Note Manually adjusting trimmers on your PCNC 1100 will put your speed reference out of calibration Using Tormach PCNC 1100 9 10 30625 Rev C3 1 Machine upgrades and configuration Manual adjustments can also affect speed stability and starting reliability The XML Tweak program electronically adjusts the high speed command generated by the computer to equal the high speed command generated by the manual speed control Again since each computer is different it is important to re run the XMLTweak program whenever you connect a new computer to your PCNC 1100
14. Adjust PCNC Profile JESPON CONPCNC M 3 aml CAUTION Do not run this ublity when machine Control Software i running or you will lose pour changes when you close the Control Software Printer Pot 9 5 7 Using a Non standard Printer Port Printer port address in Hex 370 does not need Ox in number There are several reasons why you may wish Help to use a different printer parallel port from the one on your PC s motherboard for example a PCI bus plug in card In this case you will almost certainly need to reconfigure the PCNC Control Software to use a different in OFF position address from the standard motherboard address which in hexadecimal is 0x378 te Use this procedure OER a ee ae pune 1 Close the Control Software if you have it open Spindle Calibration Spindle steps per unit are 1000 0 will be 999 929 Volts on Manual jp knob at full speed Measure voltages volts on Auto Hi pullesk y with Spindle solatar 5 4200 Figure 9 12 The measured voltages 2 Click on the Start Menu and choose Control Panel 3 On the top left hand side click on Switch to Classic View Note If it says Switch to Category View that means you have already switched to Classic View 4 Double click the System icon Choose the Hardware tab and click on Device Manager 6 Find the Ports COM amp LPT icon and click on the plus sign figure 9 13 shows t
15. An evaluation copy is bundled with the PCNC 1100 If you already have a favorite CAD program then this will be a good choice for you Block of XMotorMount Figure 4 12 Model for mount Figure 4 11 Motor Mount DXF Figure 4 11 shows a DXF drawing of a mounting plate for a motor This was produced from the solid model in figure 4 12 but could have been drawn with virtually any program Using Tormach PCNC 1100 4 6 30625 Rev C3 1 From an idea to a part A SheetCam MotorMountBack job File Edit View Tools Processes Options Mach Help Pol oops ml Pol elololelelele R ski A T1 Mill Router 6 mm diameter G T2 Mill Router 0 375 inch diameter T10 Drill 6 8 mm diameter T11 Drill 5 mm diameter T12 Drill 8 6 mm diameter T13 Drill 6 mm diameter T15 Drill 3 3 mm diameter Y Spiral pocket Register Mill Router 0 375 inch diameter 0 Spiral pocket Through Mill Router 0 375 inch diameter 0 Y Drill Holes5 Drill 5 mm diameter 0 5906 inch Deep Drill Holes6 Drill 6 8 mm diameter 0 5906 inch Deep Unable to display Part Center X 2 498 inch Y 1 7913 inch A O degrees Minors PY I Figure 4 13 SheetCAM job for Motor Mount Figure 4 13 shows the drawing loaded as a Sheet CAM job TurboCADCAM 3 Professional Edition is an example of a 2 2D CAD CAM system that is very well matched to the PCNC 1100 It offers the dynamic dimensioning and G c
16. D roodus compensation mumba G general function see Table 5 I X axis offset for arcs Po mamona O J Y axis offset for arcs a Y offset in G87 canned cycle K Z axis offset for arcs A E ametejde L number of repetitions in canned cycles subroutines key used with G10 miscellaneous function see Table 7 N line number O Subroutine label number dwell time in canned cycles dwell time with G4 key used with G10 tapping depth in M871 M874 E AA repetitions of subroutine call E eee canned cycle retract level spindle speed Y axis of machine Z axis of machine Using Tormach PCNC 1100 7 6 30625 Rev C3 1 7 5 3 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 2 7 5 3 3 Programming language reference Word A word is a letter other than N or O followed by a real value Words may begin with any of the letters figure 7 1 The table includes N and O for completeness even though as defined above line numbers are not words Several letters 1 J K L P and R may have different meanings in different contexts A real value is some collection of characters that can be processed to come up with a number A real value may be an explicit number such as 341 or 0 8807 a parameter value an expression or a unary operation value Definitions of these follow immediately Processing characters to come up with a number is called evaluating An explicit number evaluates to itself Number The following rules are used for
17. O TINTSETP COMIDO AS system HELMISOFTWARE Microsoft Windows Currentver All then Apply O TINTSETP CAWINDOWS system HKLM SOFTWARE Microsoft Windoiws Currenti er Some people prefer O jusched C Program PilesiJaw HELMISOFTWARE Microsoft Windows Currentver O HP WETEY C Program Files Hewl HELM SOFTWARE Microsoft Windows Currentyer to have the PCNC O Nerocheck C WINDOWS system HELMISOFTWARE Microsoft Windows Currentyer software called out O fppdis3a COMMINDIOWS Syste HKLMSOFTWARE Micrasoftl Windows Current er O MeMcTray RUNDLLS2 EXE ow HELM SOFTWSRE Microsoft Windows Currentyer in the Startup i T group so the control program is running as soon as the computer is turned on In this case leave that as the only Startup program 30635 Rev C3 1 25 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 Enable All coni K a D Figure 10 2 Disable Startup programs Appendices 8 Clock OK to complete 10 3 2 Disable Power Management 1 Right click on your desktop and then click Properties 2 Click on the Screen Saver tab 3 Set Screensaver to None 4 Press the Power button near the bottom 5 Set all options to NEVER shut down automatically 10 3 3 Disable Automatic Updates Background Automatic updates can initiate a CPU stealing background task This can create havoc if it occurs while the machine is running a program Some updates force a system re boot after a timeout period This is disastrous when ru
18. Tormach toolsetter perform probing operations These are divided into measuring probing X and or Y positions and probing Z positions To make effective use of these screens you need a basic understandings of the concepts of Work Offsets and the Tool Length offset ii Se a You will have used Work Offsets already in setting up in a any work on the table even if only unconsciously by using the axis Zero buttons As they do not involve Tool length offsets we will describe the X Y Probing screen first Before this there is one bit of configuration to do e Measure the diameter of you probe tip usually made of ruby to avoid wear with your best In Program coord micrometer The standard tip is 4 millimeter 0 1575 O 0000 e Enter this diameter for Tool 99 on the Offsets Enga Tomai screen figure 8 9 Ignore the Length for now and if it is zero then the Offset On Off LED will Figure 8 9 Data for Probe T 99 not be lit This is unimportant Simple X Y Probing This screen figure 8 10 allows you to set the origin X 0 0 Y 0 0 point to some feature of the stock material or a partly finished component The three pictures represent the three operations on this screen a Finding center of a bore b Finding a plane surface and c Finding the corner of the fixed jaw of a vise The convention is on all screens is that a yellow screen button will make the PCNC move the probe looking for Using Tormach PCNC 1100 8 4 30
19. Using Tormach PCNC 1100 2 12 30625 Rev C3 1 Preparation Start and EStop Spindle Coolant FRO 600 The Start button will energize the circuits for the axis drives and for the spindle motor The saat ad Sy reo L Stop button stops all motion and is the asa x 00000 ES E Emergency Stop EStop control The Stop z Z 2 0000 r Ss button locks in the off position once it has been oe E 0 0000 f i y pressed as safety feature It can be released by a turning the button head a quarter turn clockwise cof a Note Once the stop button has been pressed the Po start button is inoperative until the stop button is a a amas pera a ame snl Wad Seen corneana umani meani cn one a o ne The Machine LED indicates that the Start button has been pressed When it is lit then the Figure 2 15 Comprehensive Run screen Machine OK LED on the computer screen should be solid green If this does not happen then you should check that the cable between the PCNC and computer is fully plugged in at both ends You will be able to test some controls on the PCNC even if the LED does not give the correct indication but you will have to find the fault before you can move the PCNC axes under computer control An important safety interlock is that the rotation of the spindle can be disabled while maintaining axis drive power by the Spindle Lockout key switch The switch on the spindle drive door performs the same function These are u
20. When you switch on you can choose from which partition you want to boot Appendix 3 gives a checklist of actions to achieve the leanest Windows system The recommendations there are helpful but not always necessary Do not leap in and do everything unless you have problems with machine motion Apply them in the order given until jogging and rapid moves are smooth Optimization of Windows is more important on slower computers below 1 6 GHz Using Tormach PCNC 1100 2 8 30625 Rev C3 1 2 7 3 2 7 3 1 2 7 3 2 Preparation Installing the Control Software Installing You do not need the PCNC connected to the computer by the parallel cable yet If you are just starting 1t would be better not to have 1t connected You must not have a printer connected to the parallel port The Control Software will not operate correctly with a printer attached to the parallel port and it may damage the printer Switch off the PC the PCNC and unplug the 25 pin connector from the back of the PC Now switch the PC back on Load the release CD into your CD drive If you have auto run configured on your computer then the installer will start running Otherwise use Windows Explorer or the My Computer icon to open the CD Select View gt Details from the menu Double click on the file Install BAT to run it You will be guided through the usual installation steps for a Windows program such as accepting the license conditions and selecting the folder f
21. cable 3 Version 2 0 USB A to A extension M F 2 USB extension cable extending the short cable normally found on keyboards and other USB devices Tormach PN 30279 LOFT USB 2 0 A to A Male Female Extension Cable 3 USB multimedia mini keyboard with integral 2 port USB hub This is about the size of most laptop keyboards The keyboard includes a key which will power down the computer allowing a convenient way to shutdown the system It also has two USB ports These can be used for a USB mouse USB flash drive or one of the PCNC jogging pendants The keyboard is not sealed against coolant or chips This is Tormach PN 30284 Mini Media USB Keyboard w hub 4 A Tormach USB jogging pendent is a very useful accessory for jogging manual operations and machine setup Two options are available a key based pendant Tormach PN 30214 Pendent 10 key USB keypad and a jog shuttle controller pendant that gives very fine control of jogging speeds and distances Tormach PN 30616 Jog Shuttle Controller 5 LCD signal cables are normally too short Most inexpensive VGA signal extension cables create serious signal degradation This is particularly true with Super VGA screen resolutions Tormach PN 30280 LOFT SVGA Super VGA M F Monitor Cable w ferrites is designed to extend Super VGA signals without degradation 6 This is simply the AC power cord of the computer The Computer switch on the operator console controls a convenience outlet on the bottom o
22. figure 6 3 You will be able to feel when the paper foil gets trapped You then know that the tool is 2 above the stock The advantage of this method is that you will always be able to find a gauge and it can be used on a very small flat surface on the stock e g the boss of a casting The disadvantage particularly with hard stock and brittle tools e g carbide is that it is easy to jog down too far and damage the tool cutting edge 6 2 2 Roller Gauge Method For this method you need a short length of rod of a known diameter 14 is quite suitable for most jobs The shank of a twist drill can be used in an emergency but take care to use Figure 6 4 Tool much too low for gauge one without scoring on it and measure the diameter rather than assuming it is the nominal size of the drill Jog the tool so it is clear of the stock but no more than the gauge diameter above it You will be unable to roll the gauge under the tool figure 6 4 While attempting to roll the gauge into the gap very slowly jog upwards You will easily feel the point where the gauge rolls under figure 6 5 If you jog too far then it is easy to remove the gauge jog down a little and try again You know that the tool is the diameter of the Figure 6 5 Gauge just rolls under tool gauge above the stock The advantages of this method are that you do not risk crashing the tool into anything and if you are repeatedly gauging say multiple
23. rather than an action e g measuring so you will get better results thinking about the part of the machine on which you want information Thus looking for Tool offset measuring will give better results than looking for Measuring tool offset For important information both entries will probably appear If you have difficulty because you tried to look something up and the index entry was missing please take a moment to e mail tech tormach com with a note of a the words you were looking up and b where in the manual you found the information you wanted assuming you did A Absolute distance mode E AAA NEN O E 7 26 Absolute II MOE curras 7 14 Absolute machine coordinates Ene 6 1 o E 7 20 Accessory socket ooocccconccccoccconocnnonccnonccnnononos 2 13 on control panel coooccncocnnnnncnnnncnnnonnnnnnns 5 2 Address setting non stsetting non standard printer port 9 10 Adjustable parallel gauge ocoooncccnonnnnnccno 6 4 Arc center fOrMat oooccccoccnononnnoncnnnnnnnnonannnnnnos 7 14 Arc radius forMat coooccccoccncncnnnoncnncnncnnonannnnnnons 7 13 Arc at feedrate G02 G03 defined ooooonccnccnoccncnncononcnoncnnnnnnnnnos 7 13 Arc motion A A o 7 2 ASSEMDIY Y axis C11 C iia 2 4 Axis controls family CS We Oar ocr ao A 5 6 Axis coordinate DRO LS CASO IOMA e MEE io OE EAE 5 6 Axis jogging control family SCOTS 1 AAA Ue 5 7 keyboard OMA corso lots dicta 5 7 O O A 5 7 A E
24. short line Figure 2 19 MDI Line in use The command to start the spindle in the clockwise direction is M3 and the command to stop it is M5 Click the mouse in the bar marked MDI It will highlight You type the command in the highlighted line Unlike in DROs the Backspace Del Left and Right arrow keys are available to help you correct any typing errors When you press Enter the command will be executed Pressing Esc abandons it and closes the MDI line You can try starting and stopping the spindle with M3 and M5 G codes Notice that the recent commands are displayed in a fly out box You can choose one of these to copy into the MDI line using the Up and Down arrow keys Figure 2 19 shows the MDI line after the spindle has been started M3 and the M5 has been typed but not yet executed by Enter There are some handy features of the MDI box It can be opened by pressing Enter rather than needing a mouse click It stays open after a command has been executed It can be closed by Enter when it is blank Note All keystrokes go to the MDI when it is open so it is not possible to execute shortcuts or jog the axes If the keyboard does not do what you expect then you probably still have the MDI line open Jogging the Axes The final thing to try before actually making your first Jog ON OFF Ctr AltJ part is to move jog the PCNC axes using the keyboard Jog Mode Num There are several options for jogging which will be C
25. tools because the setting is always the same you do not have to keep typing its size into the Control Program The disadvantage is that you need to be able to jog slowly to get an accurate result You may find it convenient to set the Slow Jog rate to suit the gauging and use the Shift key as an override to get into the starting position Figure 6 6 Parallel adjusted to gap 30635 Rev C3 1 6 3 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 6 2 3 Adjustable Parallel Method You need an adjustable sliding parallel gauge Jog by eye so that the tool is about the nominal size of the parallel Insert it in the gap between tool and stock slide it to fill the gap and lock it off figure 6 6 Carefully remove the parallel and measure it with a micrometer or caliper figure 6 7 The advantage of this method is that you do not need any careful jogging The disadvantages are the need to measure the parallel and then to accurately type Figure 6 7 Measuring the parallel gauge the result which will generally be an awkward number into the DRO You can of course use a combination of these methods depending on what you have to hand on a job and which is most convenient 6 2 4 Comments on Accuracy With practice you will be able to use these methods to measure to better than 0 001 It is however interesting to look at other issues which affect the accuracy of your work The PCNC is a very rigid machine and is fitted with precision anti
26. 000 Each macro is set up for a Select LargelSmal m particular pitch of thread tapping head Toggle O oo m and choice of tapping head This information is Figure 5 28 Tapping Configuration provided by the Tapping Configuration family of controls figure 5 28 The TPI or Pitch DRO is interpreted in a different way depending on whether the part program calling its macro is running in Inch G20 or metric G21 mode In G20 mode the value is a number of threads per inch and in G21 mode it is the pitch of the thread in millimeters It is 30635 Rev C3 1 5 15 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 5 2 2 18 9 3 5 3 1 Machine Controls perfectly possible to change modes within a program and so have a job with mixed thread standards Fortunately Inch numbers are unlikely to be pitches and vice versa The control software checks that the chosen pitch can be cut at the current spindle speed when the macro 1s called so there is little chance of damage to a tap Both tapping heads have a high speed reverse feature to minimize tapping time As the gear ratios are different for each head you must define which is going to be used by toggling to the appropriate large or small LED Misc Settings Control Family Current Units This displays the units currently Current Units selected figure 5 29 Inch Metric Ignore Tool Change LJ WE 620 GH ___ 0 1000 Normally when the part program calls for a different tool Change depending on your
27. 6 3A LEDs on various screens to indicate F3Z 6 3A Z axis Power DC Bus Board output or functional status The A ee eee Diagnostics screen also has indicators DC Bus Board for X Y and Z home limit switches 20A Spindle Drive VFD PN 30163 and accessory input status These are EA useful to determine if the input is operational rectangular indicators referred as There are also various physical LED indicators within the electrical cabinet Among these are e VFD Red Enable Indicates the spindle drive is ready to turn e VFD Red Fault Indicates a fault condition on the spindle drive e VFD Green Indicates power to the spindle drive e VFD Yellow Indicates the spindle drive is torque current limited e DC Power LED Indicates voltage on the DC bus power to axis drivers e X Y Z and A axis drivers Indicate power to each individual drive e Control Board LED1 Indicates power to the control board e Control Board D1 Blinking indicates speed signal for the spindle Beyond the obvious problems of broken limit switches blown fuses and damaged motor cables we suggest contacting Tormach directly for advice on diagnosing or correcting electrical problems 9 6 Preparation for Transport It will generally be straightforward to transfer the machine to a pallet and transport it in one piece The Z axis should be lowered and the spindle supported from the table on a box or solid block of timber The Z
28. 8 2 2 Probing for Work Tool Seti 110 0 cicada tl eee inet ew 8 4 A E UN A aa aaa E Goeate E EN 8 4 A E 0 1 S E E E se saee A E N E A A T 8 6 0 223 Comprehensive X Y Probin ii a E EE ASN 8 8 8 2 24 Probe Caltbrau on A A A E ance 8 11 8 2 3 Digitizing parts from a model or for reverse englineerINg8 coooccccoccncnncnnononnnoncnnnnncononannnnnos 8 12 S24 The Probe Electrical hiera siii ire dato 8 12 8 3 Autoreverse ADD oca eso rain 8 13 9 Warranty Specifications and Maintenance ccecscsesseeeeeees 9 2 9 1 Intended Use AcM AA Laird 9 2 30635 Rev C3 1 V Using Tormach PCNC 1100 Contents 9 2 SUPPO ooa In ese stesessdodsssevsscenuisscoesedessunses lt sceesseetess 9 2 This manual ALWAYS the first place to check oocooonccccocccnnocononoconnonononanonnns 9 2 o Related documents found at http www tormach com documents htm 9 2 o Our website at www tormach Com rias 9 2 o Bn 00 ee ct A eia EE AEA 9 2 o Telephone Tormach at 608 849 8381 ooocooonccconccnnoconcnncnnnnnononnnononncnonanononannnnanonnns 9 2 e Fax Tormach at 209 885 4534 0 0 cccccseccccssecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeesseecaeneeessesseeseeseseeseseeees 9 2 9 3 Outside of the Scope of Intended Use e ssseosssecossecccsseessssecsssecssseessseesosscosssecsssecssseesssseo 9 2 9 4 Jo nn A 9 3 NI IN oa EEE E EEE AEE AE EEEE A E E 9 3 DAD Hech sorores a E 9 3 o SS A e ene E O E Teer ee ee Tee 9 4 Ts CODO Soria oie 9
29. 9999 do not move axis by the Toggle T C Units button Figure 5 25 Tool change position Using Tormach PCNC 1100 5 14 30625 Rev C3 1 5 2 2 15 5 2 2 16 5 2 2 17 Machine controls Note The move will take place correctly whatever units the machine is in at the time and because machine coordinates are used to a fixed place irrespective of the offsets in use The tool change position is also used when you want to use the central lubrication system This family also allows you to set the machine coordinates used if your part program executes a G28 We advise you to use the M998 toolchange location whenever possible as this checks that the machine is referenced 1 e the machine coordinates are valid G28 will use whatever values are in use irrespective of them being valid because the machine is referenced Inhibits and Overrides Control Family Axis Inhibit Overrides In testing a part program it is sometimes xE Alo useful to be able to inhibit the Y Auto LimitOverRide C movement of an axis e g typically Z m _ This is done with the Axis Inhibit zp AAA ae buttons figure 5 26 ig Figure 5 26 Inhibits and overrides family When an axis hits a limit switch it will trigger a software EStop condition so all movement will cease If Auto LimitOverRide is enabled then you can reset the system and carefully jog off the limit If you want more security in this situation you can disable AutoLimitOverRide and click
30. Cont step slow Joq Rate 10 0 Click the Jog ON OFF button or use its shortcut Ctrl Alt Smile coma den Mee J to turn on the screen LEDs beside it if they are not already on Click Jog Mode or use its shortcut to turnon Figure 2 20 Simple jog controls the larger of the LEDs above the word Cont for explained in detail below The jogging controls are at the top right hand side of the screen figure 2 20 30635 Rev C3 1 2 15 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 2 9 Preparation Continuous jogging Type the value 10 into the Slow Jog Rate DRO do not forget the Enter to accept the value In the next steps you may find the directions of movement are unexpected Therefore when you use the arrow keys you should be prepared to quickly release the key if the axes moves in an unexpected direction or is near its limit of travel Now press the Left Right Up and Down arrows on the keyboard The table will move while you hold the key down If you crash into the limit switches then the LED beside the red Reset button will flash and the machine will stop Click on Reset and very carefully jog the other way Take care not to mechanically hit the limit doing this in the wrong direction You will lose the referenced status if you trip a limit switch You might find the directions of movement are unexpected Figure 2 21 shows the tool above a work piece The positive X Y and Z directions are marked by arrows If you press the Right arrow key the
31. Direction Pimm Minch L 0 25008 0 900 7 fj Coolant Post Code Save Settings Clear_ File Rewound Ready SS Figure 4 19 Circular Pocket Wizard G code from a Wizard You should carefully check the code generated by a Wizard particularly 1f it is one which you have not used before Things to look out for are e Whether the Wizard sets a speed for the spindle S word and starts it and how it controls the coolant e ff any motion will conflict with clamps for your work e Which position on the work piece the Wizard considers to be X 0 Y 0 A good check is to define Z 0 to be a plane a few inches above your work piece and do a test run of the Wizard s code Commercial Wizards While many Wizards are bundled free of charge with the PCNC 1100 a set from New Fangled Solutions is a trial of a product which requires a separate license You can use all its features to evaluate what the Wizards can cut but without the license you cannot actually produce the G code part program Using Tormach PCNC 1100 4 10 30625 Rev C3 1 5 9 1 5 1 1 Machine controls Machine Controls This chapter gives a description of all the PCNC 1100 controls on the operator s panel and the Control Program screens If you have been through the section Running the PCNC in Chapter 2 you already have a good grounding and may wish to skim through this chapter on first reading of the manual and come back to it when you
32. Figure 8 7 Tormach probe 30635 Rev C3 1 8 3 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 8 2 2 8 2 2 1 Machine upgrades and configuration any accidental startup of the spindle motor which would rip the cable out of the probe body A Renishaw or other standard probe can be interfaced using an appropriate cable Interface details are given below The other possibility is to have a tool in the spindle and replace the work with the switch This allows measurement of the length of the tool and setting the coordinates of the plane on which the switch is standing Figure 8 8 shows the Tormach Tool Setter p n 30669 in use on a tooling plate a 4 l A lt t 3 There are two main uses for the measurements taken i ME gt a They can be used to set up the offsets in the V le Control Software so that the cutting defined by the part program is in the correct place relative to the stock material or part machined component b They can be recorded to allow the shape of i an existing model object to be input to a Il computer aided design CAD program We refer to the first application as probing and the second as digitizing po an Probing for Work Tool Setting on NA PER And The basic operation of the probe is controlled ers Se SE by the G31 code q v In practice you will not O want to write programs to set up a job so a ee A 0 TT RA A series of interactive screens is provided to Figure 8 8
33. G18 G19 defined oocccccccnncccnnccnnionnnno 7 16 ENE AA A ee ee 7 16 Power supply requirements cooocccnoccnnono 2 3 2 6 A Raise ids e E 1 1 Printer port setting non standard address ooocccooccnoom 9 10 A E See Straight probe o sit ine lth tee ttl he Oaaiee 8 11 Probes and TOO Setters ml datada 8 3 Probing COMIPTENENSIVE DO Vr lila 8 8 Modine center OL DOE dea 8 5 finding position Of a face oooccconccncnccnnoncnnnnos 8 5 for corner of a VISC casio sets ll dana lilas side 8 6 setting coordinate rotati0N oocccooccccnocnnonccnnns 8 10 SUITING A A A 8 4 A EE A 8 7 ARAS O E E E icco ds 8 6 Profile display name of profile in USE ooocccooccc 5 6 Program error NanGn S i secs wisest dian ioe tea lates 7 31 Program end IWIO ZI IMIS U eroine nienie e E en onip Tad 7 28 Prosranvextemas nit loco 5 11 Program stop Meine 7 27 Pullback DRO A O 7 22 Pulleys spindle speed control ESC 5 8 R R8 tooling inserting ANd removing occccoocnncncnnnnnnnnoncnnnnanoss 5 3 Radius format AlC occoocnnncnccnnoocnnoncnnonanononacnnnanoss 7 13 Rapid motion OO ST A of O II seeds 7 11 Reaming and boring canned cycle A caieties easiest tae eee eae ue ed nee ee 7 25 Re boot during installation how to manually uninstall driver if you fail to do it A 2 11 A e 2 9 Receiving new machine ooccccoccncnccnnoncnnononnnoncnnnns 2 4 Reference G29 laa ii illo 7 17 Referenced LED esca
34. G75 Default Absolute Input I J K G80 Default Canned Cycle Cancel G81 Spotting Drill Cycle G82 Speed Peck Drill Cycle G83 Full Retract Peck Drill Cycle G85 Boring Cycle G86 Boring Cycle Spindle Stop G87 89 User Definable G90 Default Absolute Input G91 Incremental Input G92 00 Set Program Part Zero MOO Program Stop MO1 Optional Program Stop M02 Program End M03 Spindle Clockwise M04 Spindle Counter clockwise MO5 Spindle stop M06 Tool change MO7 M08 Coolant MO9 All Coolant Off Options The PCNC 1100 comes preconfigured for low cost 4th axis addition Software support wiring cabinet holes and drive mount holes are all in place for an easy 4th axis addition A wide range of accessories such as tapping heads probes tool setting sensors are available Maintenance Protecting from Rust Exposed iron and steel surfaces should always be protected from rust and corrosive environments If your machine will be unused for more than a couple days you should mist the machine with light water repellant oil such as WD 40 The rust preventative characteristics of coolant may not be effective in trapped areas It is desirable to apply way oil or machine oil directly to the table surface under the trapped area when you mount a vise or fixture on the machine Neglect this and you may be welcomed by a rusty machine surface when you remove the fixture some days later Lubrication The central lubrication pump should be filled with q
35. It and the following code will normally be written with other subroutines and follow an M2 M30 or M99 so it is not reached directly by the flow of the program The L word or optionally the Q word gives the number of times that the subroutine is to be called before continuing with the line following the M98 If the L Q word is omitted its value defaults to 1 By using parameters values or incremental moves a repeated subroutine can make several roughing cuts around a complex path or cut several identical objects from one piece of material Subroutine calls may be nested That is to say a subroutine may contain a M98 call to another subroutine As no conditional branching is permitted it is not meaningful for subroutines to call themselves recursively 30635 Rev C3 1 7 29 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 7 8 8 7 9 7 9 1 7 9 2 7 9 3 Programming language reference Return from Subroutine M99 To return from a subroutine program M9 9 Execution will continue after the M98 which called the subroutine If M99 is written in the main program 1 e not in a subroutine then the program will start execution from the first line again See also M47 to achieve the same effect Application Defined M codes Self reversing Tapping Cycles To use the Tormach Auto reverse tapping heads program M871 P or M872 M873 M874 The P word specifies the depth to be threaded relative to the current Z position which will typically be just cl
36. MM ANY Y ETT RA AQ AN JESKSISSSSISSISSLSLAY UY e 0 78 A A 19 80 81 82 83 84 64 49 87 88 89 90 gt Se wz O 0 N o L Q ES SO O amp O 228R o gt ZEL OE Q gt O O Parts List for PCNC 1100 Drawing D40134 Upper Exploded November 2005 ID_ Number Description ID Number Description 6 30310 Shaft _ 54 80200 Zaxisstep motor __ 8 30312 Sleeve 56 30360 Washer5 _ 9 30313 Cam 57 30361 Washer __ _ _ 12 30316 Upper spindle bearing 60 30364 Lock washer 14mm _ 18 30322 Washer12mm_ 66 30370 ScrewM16 20 30324 Spindle motor base 68 30372 Z ball screw cover plate _ 21 30325 Washer 10mm 69 30373 Z axis ball screw bearing 32 30336__ Handle pin 80 80884 Zaxisgib 38 30342 Adjustable base clamp bolt 86 30390 Unused _ _ 41 30345 Adjustable base clamp handle 89 30393 Key8X26 42 30346 Spindle motor 90 30394 Lower spindle spacer __ Cylindrical pin 4X16 45 30349 Screw M12x45 30507 DrawbarforR8taper__ 46 30350 Sleeve 30506 Drawbar for BT30 taper _ Annular Bearing Engineering Council identification DT7008 DT double tandem pair 2 i Spindle Cartridge Assembly for R8 includes callout numbers 1 3 12 13 14 73 87 88 and 90 For BT30 Spindle Cartr
37. P 5372 ioe G02 X 0 0598 Y 2 1816 Z A Z E Shift to ignore Siow Joa Rate 21 _zeroul 0 2000 F 31 50 G02 X 0 1402 Y 3 1447 2 Machine Coords Override E100 Z Z G01 X 0 1402 Y 2 1816 Z Fa Z G02 X 0 0877 Y 1 7048 G01 X 0 0861 Y 1 6749 v Cycle Start AltR e Hi Low Hi Low tow Max ton i 1750 RP Stop Alt S S 71750 Rewind Ctrl W ___ Spindle CW F5 a 3 CHANGE TOOL Ji 0 O 0 0 0 0 vet Pause spc Empty z off 3 000 __Coolant Cul C D 0 000 MDI Regenerate Toolpath Jog Follow l E RESET D RaidJunk NCParts test2c tap Na Histo Clear MILLING POCKET PCNC M3 R2 6 SRev6 7 Program Run G Co des M Co des Simple Run CtI Alt 1 Comp Run Alt 1 MDI Alt 2 Tootpath ans Offsets Alt 5 Settings Alt6 Diagnostics Alt Figure 4 10 Keyhole loaded and ready to run The CAM program will write the G code part program to disk Assuming you are using a different computer to design your part from that controlling the machine you need to transfer the file to the hard drive of the control computer Then you can load and run it in the same way you did for the FirstPart program Figure 4 10 shows the keyhole loaded into the Control Software Note Do not attempt to run part programs off a USB key drive or floppy disc CAD CAM Systems SheetCAM is a 242D system which will accept DXF drawings from virtually any source has powerful features and is very easy to learn
38. Touch Length Touch _Refz Acoord 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 A 0 0000 _Zero Touch Goto Tool Change Home key Ref XYZ _RefA Figure 6 16 Offsets screen with tool 1 in place enter 1 in the T Current tool DRO figure 6 16 What follows will be clearer if we set a work offset for this master tool so that at Z 0 0 the tool touches the top of some stock This is also what one would do to use the tool So using any of the tool touching methods we set the work offset and use MDI to go to Z 0 0 figure 6 17 Program coord Work Offset G54 G52 G92 Offset T Current Tool 1 Machine coord Face lanes emai a X coord 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 rool Diameter e X 0 0000 l Zero Touch 0 500 _Ret X Y coord 0 0160 0 0000 0 0000 appieawin 641142 y 0 01 _Zero Touch Ref Y Z coord 0 0000 10 3547 0 0000 5 100 z 5 2547 Zero Touch Length Touch Ref Z Acoord 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 A 0 00008 Zero Touch Goto Tool Change Home key RefXxyz _RefA ee Touch 0 250 Ctr H Go Home Switches ead SI gt Gauge Block thickness etc _Onfoft C Jog ON OFF cir ans g0z 0 1 ol _Jog Step Num _ g00z0 __Jog Mode Num BO Wa g00z0 0 S OOOO OE EA Figure 6 17 After setting the work offset with master tool and GOO to Z 0 0 If you are observant you will see that the Z machine coordinate is lower because we jogged down to a gauge and then moved to Z 0 0 in the program coor
39. Z 0 1 by GUO ALO l4 Z 051 Figure 6 2 shows the axis DROs that you would see while the whole story is shown in figure 6 1 Let us use X as an example The program coordinate for the tool is currently X 1 0 we dida G00 X1 0 The offset to be added to this to get the machine coordinate is 3 Adding these two values together gives the machine coordinate value of 4 These numbers are nice round values because we only roughly jogged to the top left corner of the stock Now look at Z The jog was about 9 5 down but we put the tool exactly on the surface of the stock The program coordinate is Z 0 1 from the GOO Z 0 1 The Z offset value is actually 9 5123 so the jog of about 9 5 was actually 9 5123 Adding the program coordinate to the offset gives the machine coordinate of 9 6123 This is of course the distance that the head currently is below the home switch position The offsets we have been setting are called Work Offsets as they are different for each piece of work loaded onto the machine Later we will see how Tool Offsets can allow for different projection of different tools from the spindle nose So to summarize any move made in a part program or MDI line which gives a new set of program coordinate values will cause the Control Software to add on the appropriate offsets and move the machine position to the newly calculated value of the machine coordinates value You may find it helpful to move the tool around on your
40. a 5 6 Referencing MPO EC OE rl ds 3 2 INTOdUCHON Or e e TEE 3 1 Resen Dutto ata ias 5 12 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 32 Repeating part program indefinitely M47 7 29 Repeating part program indefinitely M99 7 30 Reset button te A meee Res rn a 5 5 Return level after canned cycle E A A cite AT 7 27 Rewind DOOM noia 5 10 Roller gauge ia 6 3 Roll you OWNn gauge ooocccooccccnccncnncononnnononncnnonccnnns 6 2 Rotational axes Gi AA O remnant tan emer Re rer 7 1 Rotational diameter correction controls Tan DY illo 5 14 Run from here button ooooccooocnconcnnononnnononos 5 10 S S word spindle speed s 5 206 esi cdondecksckalvenctandicis 7 31 Safety encek ISU tio 1 2 Dual supply implications Of ooocccooccco 1 1 from machine location and mounting 2 2 futther readin iaa cds 1 2 o ENA E E A AAT ae eetaceuess 1 1 Groundin aseena esehen cdas 1 1 Safety WIND isis idas 1 1 professional advice oooncccoccnconccncnocnnoncnnnnnnoos 1 1 Scale factor on axis data G50 G51 7 20 Scale factor DRO o A 5 7 SCANS Cordial S esten dales asii 7 1 O 7 1 Screen switching buttons ooocccooccconocnnononnnnno 5 6 Screen switching controls described siii teenies senent 5 5 Selected plane Ci A A N E RA 7 3 Set fixture coordinate systems G10 7 15 SEU MEXCIIME DUO st dd 5 10 Snuttle controller alii sido niansdestecns 5 8 Simula
41. adjusted for preload sustained high spindle speed will bring the spindle bearings to about 200 F 93 C This is a normal condition Higher preload in the spindle bearings will result in even higher temperatures and excessive wear Major castings are fitted or scraped for precision fits and machine accuracy Exchanging parts between machines or replacing parts can affect the machine accuracy Dowel pins are used for alignment between parts The dowel holes are drilled after alignment between parts and are unique the original parts Replacement parts cannot use the original dowel holes The following tightening torques are appropriate to the metric fasteners used in the PCNC 30635 Rev C3 1 se a f a 9 13 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 Appendices 9 5 8 2 Electrical Electrical Service Certain service and troubleshooting operations require PCNC 1100 Fuses access to the electrical cabinet while Location the electrical power is on Only qualified electrical technicians should A ae ees have perform such operations FU2 Se Rail Mounted in Cabinet Many electrical problems are self Rail Mounted in Cabinet apparent Tracing electrical problems Power can be done with a combination of the FUA 63A ssl amp Control Board PN 30162 machine control software the LED omputer indicators within the machine cabinet FUS Control Board Com Bera PNE and the machine actions Power The operating software has colored DC Bus Board 15A 1A
42. axis should be under a relatively neutral force not under stress by being parked with a high downward force nor held up by the ballscrew Run it down to a wooden block but do not crunch it hard into the block If required the stepper motors for the axes can be removed following the reverse of the procedure described for installing the Y axis drive You can also remove the Z axis motor to reduce the overall height of the machine Take care to secure the motors after they are removed so strain is not placed on the wiring All bare metal surfaces should be oiled before moving the machine as a means of protection against condensation and corrosion Using Tormach PCNC 1100 9 14 30625 Rev C3 1 9 7 10 Machine upgrades and configuration Disassembly for Transport Warranty is void if the machine is disassembled Tormach recognizes that there are situations where users need to disassemble their mill and has made provisions in the design of the mill to facilitate this Never the less Tormach cannot responsible for alignment precision and operating functions if the machine is disassembled Test your machine before disassembling it The major sub assemblies of spindle head column and base are bolted and dowelled together so the machine can be separated into smaller components to meet very challenging transport problems Note however that this entails disconnecting wiring and the lubrication lines We recommend taking a very large number of
43. causes the current MDI line to be executed and the MDI remains active for input of another set of commands The Esc key clears the line and de selects it arma i Free ey wagi Load Edit Start Teach E Stop Teach written in the MDI line rather Offset On Off T 1 than controlling the machine In particular jogging keys will not lt Offset 1 be recognized you must Esc after entering MDI The Control Software can g 0 1 y2 1 remember all the MDI lines as it i executes them and store them in a file by using the Teach facility Figure 5 20 MDI and Teach control family Click Start Teach enter the required commands and then click Stop Teach The LED blinks to remind you that you are in Teach Mode The commands are written in the file with the conventional name C PCNC3 GCode MDITeach tap Clicking Load Edit will load this file so it can be run or edited in the usual way you need to go to the Simple Run or Comp Run screen to see it If you wish to keep a given set of taught commands then you should Edit the file and use Save As in the editor to give it your own name and put it in a convenient folder Loop Control Family The Control Software can execute a part program many times automatically Cycles 7 g updating a limit to the depth to which the Z axis can move figure 5 21 Z step __ 0 100 Loop Active Z inhibit _ 0 750 _ _Onfort_ E Figure 5 21 Loop control The part program must end with an M30 r
44. cceccccsecccceseeceeseceeeeeeseneeeseeeseneeseeeeeeeneeeaeeeeseneees 7 30 7 9 Application Defined M codes ccssssoccssscssssovsssccsssscvssscossssocssscossssovesscocssscossscoosssosess 7 30 Tob SeH treversino Lappin yCleS anita es 7 30 ToD Goto Toolchance Postion MOS dais 7 30 Teo WSer Denied M COTES ciar seaateseaedontdentantncsvetenetataseess nets 7 30 7 10 Other Tnput Codes iia Inski 7 31 TAOTI Feed Rate E 0 A A AAA AAA 7 31 TAG Pmdle Sped p Oo AEN e 7 31 TAS elec Mol oo cias 7 31 7 11 INGA toos oeso ssassn i eoe n osonro sikonr e euep ea nea e or E Eesi aaeei 7 31 7 12 a E aai 7 31 8 Machine Upgrades and Configuration cccccesseeeseeseeeseeeeeesees 8 1 8 1 Fourth Axis Rotary Pale viceciccccscccccsksccecccoasdvcecescccececcevsscavesececescesscccbvessesssaesceccusicseeets 8 1 Seel Installino tHe Electron dls 8 1 E laa sail arsaastaneidasiatawabhue el a a siiettaad eases 8 1 8 1 2 1 Referencing and Zeroing the Fourth AXIS ss00 5 idtendaaverctdsancdapdeabenataeangtaedssbasntcesngenes 8 1 SL 2 2 Diameter Compensation Pea une taria dido tados 8 1 Sda cs AAA o 8 1 SoL Entgraviio ond Periphery Or aC ya CP iii driaicdies 8 2 A Gear Ueki taal ond a a Somes eect east oaecestacted oa mecaataecuacaaes 8 2 8 2 PL A desassenseunsecsseateudsaavescostentsedeceu bases saseesieseusaes 8 3 8 2 1 Introduction to Uses of Probes and Tool Setters ooooccooocnnooocnnonccnnoncnnnnnnnonncononacnnnanons 8 3
45. control computer Wizards can be obtained from a variety of online sources and you can modify a standard one or write your own from scratch Figure 4 18 shows an example of what the list could contain Click on the Wizard that you want to use and click Run Notice that a list that is too large to fit in the dialog has a scrollbar but rather unusually it is on the left hand side of the list The Wizard screen will replace the screen currently visible Standard Wizard Features Cam Function Addons x Figure 4 19 shows a Wizard a Function Mame for milling a circular pocket cut spline or gear Digitize Wizard Author Description Drill Circular Bolt Pattern Brian Barker Brian Barker Cut Circle Brian Barker Cut Splines and Gears Brian Barker As many different authors write Wizards there are detailed differences between the screens but each one should have the following Creates Digitzing Prograrn Art Fenerty Creates Digitzing Prograrn Art Fenerty Speed and Feed Table Brian Barker Cut Keyway Brian Barker Milling 2D with radius linking Olivier ADLER No Description Brian Barker DigitizeTest Feeds and Speeds Offset Setup Rectangular Bolt Pattern Drill Rectangular Bolt Pattern Brian Barker Cut a Rectangular Pocket Brian Barker Row Hole Pattern Brian Barker Side Clean Full Depth Kiran Rectangular Pocket Row Bolt Pattern Side Cleaning Full Depth e Save Settings but
46. covers a bigger range of sizes has a set of alternative blocks which fit into a square hole above the collet nut The tap holding arrangement without the spindle is shown in figure 8 24 and the accessories for the large head are shown in figure 8 25 This picture also shows the square hole in the tapping spindle which houses the anti rotation block The top ring on the tapping head should be screwed down to give the highest tapping torque As the machine is applying the feed any rotational slippage will cause problems Tapping can be done using the M871 M872 etc cycles tapping code generated by CAM systems such as SheetCAM and of course hand written G code The recommended sequence is the same in each case figure 8 26 Figure 8 25 Accessories for large tapping head e Feed the Z axis down at a rate corresponding to the pitch of the thread and the spindle speed The distance of this move will be the depth to be tapped plus the initial Z clearance e Rapidly retract the tapping head As the tap is held in the thread this will pull the spindle out of the head and engage reverse gear 30635 Rev C3 1 8 13 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 Machine upgrades and configuration e Feed the Z axis up at a rate corresponding to the pitch of the thread and the geared up speed of the reverse running tap The distance of this move should be sufficient to ensure the tap completely leaves the thread e Optionally position the Z axis at
47. drivers Mach x Pulsing Engine has the driver Mach3 Driver under it Use the to expand the tree if necessary Right click on Mach3 Driver gives the option to uninstall it This will remove the file Mach3 sys from the Windows folder The copy in the PCNC3 folder will still be there Running the PCNC You have now completed the installation and merely need to connect the PCNC to the computer Now close down Windows and switch off the PC Connect the parallel port of the computer to the D25 connector on the underside of the PCNC control cabinet The cable provided to connect the computer to the mill meets IEEE 1284 specifications This provides a high level of immunity to electrical noise which is important to reliable operation Do not use inferior cables Power the computer from the outlet near the D25 connector and if relevant power the monitor from the connector adjacent to it below the PCNC control cabinet Viewed from behind the inlet is on the right next to two outlets for computer and monitor The coolant pump outlet is to the left of these figure 2 11 30635 Rev C3 1 2 11 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 2 8 1 Preparation Main Switch and Control Panel The rotary main switch on the right hand side of the control cabinet disconnects the mains power from the PCNC itself and isolates computer coolant 115 230 VAC outlets that are on the bottom of the cabinet Warning You should not open the control cabinet until the mains power to the m
48. four passes Figure 3 9 shows this process in pass two When the text is done the machine will stop and request a change to tool 2 Jog up so you can change the tool to the 12 cutter If you hold the Shift key down when jogging the jog will take place at full speed rather than the 2 used for very careful positioning Change the tool and jog down with the paper under the tool Type O and Enter into the Z axis DRO to define the new Work Offsets Again check that the door is shut Click Cycle Start to run the program to cut the pocket Figure 3 10 shows this partially done When the pocket is completed the machine will stop and rewind the program so it can be used to cut another copy of the part The completed piece is shown in Figure 3 11 You can compare this with the CAD CAM visualization in figure cue 3 3 5 Summary This chapter has allowed you to make your first part with the PCNC Although it is fairly simple it would be very difficult to make without a CNC machine When you are experienced you should be able to design and make something like it from scratch in about 45 Figure 3 11 The completed part 30635 Rev C3 1 3 5 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 Making your first part minutes You might have wondered about some of the things that you were told to do Why did you cut the text then remove half its depth with the pocket Could the system be told how long each tool is so you do not need to touch tool
49. handles in the vertical position Screen Control Panels Using the Screens Although at first sight you may feel daunted by the range of options and data displayed by Control Software this is actually organized into a few logical groups We refer to these as Families of Controls By way of explanation of the term control this covers both buttons and their associated keyboard shortcuts used to operate the software and the information displayed by DROs digital read outs labels or LEDs light emitting diodes The elements of each control family are defined for reference in this chapter The families are explained in order of importance for most users You should however note that all the screens of your system do not include all the controls of a family This may be to increase readability of a particular screen or to avoid accidental changes to the part being machined in a production environment Families of Related Controls Screen Switching Controls These controls appear on each screen They allow switching between screens and also display information about the current state of the system figure 5 9 i RESET C PCNC3 Temp tap E PCNC M3 R26 SRev6 8 Program Reset Clear Initialization Macro Called on reset G Code M Cod es Simple Run Ctl Alt 1_ Comp Run Alt 1 MDI Alt 2 Toolpath Alt 3 Offsets Alt 5 Settings ans Diagnostics Figure 5 9 Screen switching control family This 1s a toggle W
50. how intelligently the CAD program can interpret the lines As drawn they are probably separate and can be moved independently figure 4 3 Most software will allow joining the lines so they move together figure 4 4 This however does not really reflect what the part is like 30635 Rev C3 1 4 3 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 4 3 3 From an Idea to a part The important things about the intent of this design are that the straight lines should be parallel and the same length and that they form a tangent to the arc at the bottom of the slot If these constraints can be given to the CAD software then it will be possible to change its sizes e g the width of the slot by dragging the radius of the bottom arc while retaining the shape figure 4 5 If the shape is defined like this then the software can display the minimum set of dimensions required to define it figure 4 6 Finally if a dimension is changed then the part can be redrawn to correspond to the new size figure 4 7 CAM We have seen the sort of features you can get from a CAD program Figure 4 5 There are also big differences between different CAM programs Constrained and Some CAM programs accept 2D models drawings of your part size changed e g DXF files and expect you to define the Z depth of features like pickets engraved text and holes Alternatively a D CAM program will find all the dimensional information in the model 0 81 in Figure 4 6 Automatic
51. jabica 7 30 Main Wicca dla 2 11 5 1 Maintenance Bearing preload adjustment occcooccccoccnnooo 9 5 FUP CATON ol dada deis 9 3 protection from TUS Esad ars 9 3 speed calibrati0D cooooccccoocnnonccnononnnononnnnnss 9 8 WAVSCOVELS O waded ET 9 4 Z axis AQJUStMEDL coooccccnccnnoncnnoncnnnnncnnonacnnnnnos 9 4 Manual Data Input to control Software 2 15 Master tool AA A bauer vette 6 9 for tool IO 0 so kee 6 8 M code A A eR ere 7 30 M codes built in summary table acosta olla pineda 7 27 A A A E A 2 15 Mechanical specifications ooccccoccnconcnnononnnoncnnnns 9 2 Messages from part program defined oooccccocccnnnnnnnn 7 9 Millimetre units CPA G AA nt eer em emer 7 17 IVI OPN DAS alii ici aug 7 1 Modal groups A cetera heptane N 7 10 Modal motion cancelling 30635 Rev C3 1 31 G30 explained A N 7 22 Mode OD JOO OLIN II a a e 2 15 Modes MACHINE deMmed naraenia 7 9 MSG string introduces an operator message 7 9 N Number A II In 7 7 O Offsets oa rones 7 20 aa 7 26 EA O AEA E E E E uel seen E T S 6 7 Offsets and coordinate systems eeceeeeeeees 6 1 Operators binary S a E E EE A A E E E E 7 7 Operators unary Gi E EEEE A EEE E A E 7 8 Operators Deli ens 5 1 Optimising Windows oocccooccncnccnnonccncnnnnnoncnnnnnnnss 2 8 Optimising Windows for PENC oooccccnccncncccnonccnnns 12 Optional program stop MOI os 7 2
52. may seem odd and all other tools will have negative length offsets but remember it does not matter where the lengths are measured from only their relative lengths is important F Load up the commonly used tools into their holders and number them The master tool 1f used for cutting is conventionally 1 and others are numbered sequentially It is often convenient that their position in a rack denotes their number If your master tool is never used for cutting then call it Tool 0 Figure 6 19 Measuring a TTS end mill Draw up a grid on paper with four columns headed Tool number Description Diameter and Relative Length Above the grid leave a space marked Actual Master Tool length As an aside we might actually have to jog up to get it in and then before we change the T DRO do G00 Z0 0 to put the Z axis back in place it was with tool 1 but it is as well to ignore this unless you are trying to follow this sequence on a machine 30635 Rev C3 1 6 9 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 6 4 4 Using the Probe and Tool Setter If you have a probe kit including a tool setter sensor then the easiest way of loading the tool table is to use it probing with each tool in turn This obviates any hand transcription of numbers The equipment also simplifies accurate setting up of work in a vise or on the table Details are given in Chapter 8 6 4 5 Tool Length Offsets with TTS You use the procedures in this section if you have the Tormach
53. mill is capable of producing three different classes of work which are usually referred to as 3D 2 2D and 2D A 3D product has complex and often smooth curves in all three dimensions A typical example is a mold for die casting vacuum forming or injection molding A 22D product has detail at several depths from the surface of the material but each piece of detail has a flat bottom surface The FirstPart cut in Chapter 3 is an example of a simple 2 2D component A 2D product has no changes in depth This might be a mechanism link cut out of a sheet of steel or lettering cut out of vinyl sheet 2D products can be milled but are usually produced on specialist machines e g a laser table or plasma cutter Design and particularly production of a 3D shape is much more time consuming than something which is 212D If the pocket in FirstPart had a dished shape with a fillet in the corners then it would have been cut with a ball nosed tool and would have required many passes a few thou apart rather than the passes about 0 3 apart that could be used with the flat end mill In addition the design process is complicated because the pocket cannot be defined by a single number 1 e its depth if it is 3D With current CAD software you will probably find it is easiest to design 2 2D parts with a 2 2D CAD package or with a full 3D one running in 2 2D mode Software for CAD CAM This section gives some guidance on things to consider when choosing so
54. movements are zero For most purposes 0 03 of a turn which is about 0 001 will be good enough e Make sure all the screws are tight and re check the calibration 8 2 3 Digitizing parts from a model or for reverse engineering Details of the software for this will be published in a later revision on this document 8 2 4 The Probe Electrical Interface 12VDC _ __ _ Pin3 12 VDC 5VDC Pin1 5 VDC c MES e 5 Pin DIN connector Pin numbers as viewed from solder side cable of plug e Pin 5 Input sinking Falechila 435 optolsolator 0 VDC a Pin4 common Common Figure 8 22 PCNC1100 Interface to probe Probes are connected to the auxiliary socket 1s provided on the operators control panel This can be used for interfacing any device that needs an input that can be read by the Control Software It can be used for user supplied devices The exact interfacing will depend on the device to be used but the following description of the available signals will allow liaison with the device supplier designer The interface is presented as a 5 pin DIN socket The pin assignment is Pin number 1 is 5 Vdc useful if you have to bring power to active electronics on a probe Pin number 3 is 12 Vdc useful if you need to supply power to active electronics on a probe Pin number 4 is logic ground Do not attach to the machine ground 1 e your probe casing should be isolated from this ground Pin number 5 is the signal
55. of cut makes to the axes In practice it is not quite so easy There are several issues but the main one is that the machine has to set a Z position before it starts cutting and at that time it does not know the direction in which the tool is going to be moving This problem is solved by providing pre entry moves which take place in waste material of the part These ensure that the compensation calculations can be done before the actual part outline is being cut Choice of a path which runs smoothly into the part s outline also optimizes the surface finish An exit move is sometimes used to maintain the finish at the end of a cut Two Kinds of Contour The Control Software handles compensation for two types of contour Figure 6 23 Two possible toolpaths to cut triangle e The contour given in the part program code is the edge of material that is not to be machined away We will call this type a material edge contour This is the sort of code that might be hand written e The contour given in the NC code is the toolpath that would be followed by a tool of exactly the correct radius We will call this type a toolpath contour This is the sort of code that a CAD CAM program might produce if it is aware of the intended cutter diameter The software does not have any setting that determines which type of contour is used but the numerical description of the contour will of course differ for the same part
56. optional stop switch program MO To stop a running program temporarily but only if the optional stop switch is on program M1 It is OK to program MO and M1 in MDI mode but the effect will probably not be noticeable because normal behavior in MDI mode is to stop after each line of input anyway If a program is stopped by an MO M1 pressing the cycle start button will restart the program at the following line 30635 Rev C3 1 7 27 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 Programming language reference To end a program program M2 or M30 M2 leaves the next line to be executed as the M2 line M30 rewinds the G code file These commands can have the following effects depending on the options chosen on the Configure gt Logic dialog e Axis offsets are set to zero like G92 2 and origin offsets are set to the default like G54 e Selected plane is set to XY like G17 e Distance mode is set to absolute like G90 e Feed rate mode is set to Units per minute mode like G94 e Feed and speed overrides are set to ON like M48 e Cutter compensation is turned off like G40 e The spindle is stopped like M5 e The current motion mode is set to G1 like G1 e Coolant is turned off like M9 No more lines of code in the file will be executed after the M2 or M30 command is executed Pressing cycle start will resume the program M2 or start the program back at the beginning of the file M30 pmo Program stop MN Optional progr
57. origin of a fixture coordinate system program G10 L2 P X Y Z A where the P number must evaluate to an integer in the range 1 to 255 the fixture number Values 1 to 6 corresponding to G54 to G59 and all axis words are optional The coordinates of the origin of the coordinate system specified by the P number are reset to the coordinate values given in terms of the absolute coordinate system Only those coordinates for which an axis word is included on the line will be reset It is an error if e The P number does not evaluate to an integer in the range O to 255 If origin offsets made by G92 or G92 3 were in effect before G10 is used they will continue to be in effect afterwards The coordinate system whose origin is set by a G10 command may be active or inactive at the time the G10 is executed The values set will not be persistent unless the tool or fixture tables are saved using the buttons on Tables screen Example G10 L2 P1 x3 5 y17 2 sets the origin of the first coordinate system the one selected by G54 to a point where X is 3 5 and Y is 17 2 in absolute coordinates The Z 30635 Rev C3 1 7 15 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 Programming language reference coordinate of the origin and the coordinates for any rotational axes are whatever those coordinates of the origin were before the line was executed 7 7 6 Clockwise Counterclockwise Circular Pocket G12 and G13 These circular pocket commands are a sort o
58. r 203 Lt y o Ena ia Es y A A AA Y eee PB1 PB2 207 200 206 ESTOP i START cee 1 2 O 202 boi l XFM1 FUS OS AME l l FU4 7 AMP FU5 1 AMP Line in 1 ine in ib No Lo al KEY switcH O 101 Cy jDISABLE BELT GUARD 230 VAC LINE tine na y Tormach Machine Control Board 5 6 EZ C E 230 120 PRIMARY SECONDARY 100 DISCONNECT CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER j OQHODOOOOO MACHINE FRAME Ltt tt BONDED TO EARTH GROUND 230 48 PRIMARY SECONDARY La a pes de C1 DC BUS POWER DC BUS BOARD MM ennection Boar L24 SS L25 i en UTO MAN sw4 L26 L 4 Lig J3 1 E XMF2 z E C1 CAP 18 000 4F J3 14 START sw3 X LIMIT Y LIMIT Z UPPER ZLOWER COMPUTER ia ae ca ee J3 13 4 a 00 r STOP SW2 401 Lay E a E e ss r T SW WD REV fi 5 885 PN 30283 DRIVE 307 pn 30283 Y DRIVE WD E2 to J1 3 OIII 7 on El to J1 4 AAA es J3 4 set 7 UA faen to J1 yo ake Wires DIR to J1 6 e10 Siz y Ji jompeted to J1 5 oi 40 21 y 012 323 _ ES 30164 i J6 19 thru J6 24 J6 13 thru J6 18 OA a P 37 AA Note More detail can be seen by viewing this document on a computer screen as a PDF file PCNC 1100 30204 Electrical Overview December 2007 D40135C Wiring Diagram 4 digit serial numbers O D FU6 6 AMP ls PB1 m q 207 dll ESTO
59. remove the machine from its pallet e Un strap the stepper motor from its transit position figure 2 5 e Remove the sheet steel cover from the Y axis drive coupling box at base of column behind the machine d PR A A ee yA e Remove the four cap head screws Figure 2 5 Y axis motor as shipped and from the back face of the coupling box mounting flange and loosen the two screws in the shaft coupling on the end of the Y axis ballscrew 4 mm or 5 32 hex wrench e Use the cap screws to mount the motor on the back face of the coupling box The wiring runs downwards from the motor It is important to ensure that the motor flange can pull up flush to the machined face of the coupling box Remove any paint that could cause mis alignment After tightening the cap screws back them off 4 turn so the motor is free to self align Using Tormach PCNC 1100 2 4 30625 Rev C3 1 Preparation e Ensure that the coupling is centrally positioned on motor shaft and the machined end of the ballscrew and tighten the cap screws on the coupling Then tighten the cap screws holding the motor figure 2 6 e Check that the axis turns with no tight spots The smooth 1 e outside face of an old auto engine timing belt or poly vee auxiliary drive belt which has been cut to make a strip can be used to turn the coupling between the stepper motor and ball screw figure 2 9 If it does feel tight then you need to recheck the alignmen
60. than the axis can move the impossible steps will be ignored so the axis will never buffer up a backlog 5 3 2 Keypad Pendant The keypad pendant has two modes of operation The CNC Num key toggles between these modes figure 5 32 When the Numeric LED is lit it is a conventional numeric pad It can be used for entering values into DROs Note that as Backspace in not available on the main keyboard during DRO entry it cannot be used on the pendant either When the LED is not lit the majority of the keys are concerned with jogging the four labeled axes X Y Z and A keys 2 3 4 6 8 9 The 7 key will perform a Home All operation homing Z to limit switches and then X and Y The 1 key will toggle the state on the Optional Stop LED When the LED is lit MO1 is treated exactly like MOO e end program otherwise MO1 is ignored Figure 5 32 Keypad pendant The key toggles between Continuous and Incremental or Step jogging modes In step one key press produces a single step axis movement The step size is displayed in a DRO The key labeled Size cycles through the available Increment Step sizes 30635 Rev C3 1 5 17 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 Offsets 6 Using Multiple Tools This chapter explains how you can configure the PCNC 1100 to use several tools without having to waste time at each tool change defining the length of the new tool It also covers techniques for simplifying machining of work in a
61. the push stroke then make certain that you do not have a broken oil line e Extreme axis positions can expose the oil distribution channels that are cut into the way support saddle surfaces If the pump is used in those positions the hydraulic force of the oil will not apply it throughout the machine as intended Instead the oil will simply squirt out at the point where the oil channel is exposed 9 5 3 Way Covers Way covers are important to keep abrasive debris out of the slide ways Inspect the way covers frequently and replace as necessary Tormach stocks way cover replacements 9 5 4 Z axis Adjustment When the power is turned off the spindle head is held up against gravity by a combination of gib pressure in the vertical slideway and the cogging force of the stepper motor If the spindle head moves down on its own when the power is off then it is time to adjust the Z axis gib This is common after the initial break in period of the machine The slide ways have tapered gib plates where the position of the gib plate controls the tightness and friction in a slide way On the exploded view Appendix 2 the Z axis gib plate is part number 80 This is held in position on both top and bottom via the gib screws part number 81 If the Z axis drifts down when the machine is turned off then the Z axis gib plate needs adjustment Adjustment Procedure CAUTION Do not remove the connector exploded view 71 that joins the Z axis mo
62. the OverRide Limits button before clicking Reset on each occasion Feeds and Speeds Calculator Different materials and tooling require different cutting speeds and feed so you will need to use published tables and your experience to define the optimum spindle speed and the feed rate for any given job A simple calculator on Imperial Speed Feed calculator the Settings screen will however do Don t forget to press lt Enter after setting a DRO the math for you when you know a Cutting speed Cutter diameter fin i alc RPM Feed cutting speed in feet per minute and required SFM _Fromtoottable a a chip per tooth loading figure 5 27 12x 23 0 375 x Pi 2 A RPM Enter your cutting data into the No of flutes Chip flute Feed at this speed DROs not forgetting to press Enter RPM x 3 x 0 01 O 7 0 in min for each value and click the Calc Don t forget to press lt Enter gt after setting a DRO RPM Feed button The screen labels show the calculation that is being done for you Figure 5 27 Speed Feed calculator Tapping Configuration Family The control software allows use of the Tormach Tapping Heads PN 30612 and 30613 without a detailed understanding of the sequence of moves that are needed to control the head The holes are tapped by using one of the M code macros M871 M872 M873 or Auto reverse tapping parameters M874 The macros work as MSF M872 M873 M874 a kind on canned cycle Tore 3200 000 150
63. the initial Z clearance height Tapping with M871 M874 Macros The M871 M874 tapping macros use 4 Z moves Feed down at the tapping feed rate to tapping depth Rapid retract to reverse the tapping head Feed up at the tapping reverse feed rate to clear the tap Rapid down to the starting point ws p Call using one parameter M871 Px xxx Px xxx Z start Z final See sample procedure below mimm N a N ee PA AA F i start l 3 moO O ey A Z final Figure 8 26 Moves in tapping a hole Notes It is usual to underfeed slightly in both directions 2 to 5 This might result in the clutch disengaging but it is better than hitting the stops on the retractable spindle The choice of a suitable tap designed for machine tapping is important Conventional taps for manual use are unlikely to give satisfactory results except on shallow depths with easy to machine materials The exact depth fed depends on the accuracy and stability of the spindle speed This makes tapping blind holes where the thread depth is nearly as deep as the drilled hole a process which requires experiment to get the optimum depth There are alternative feed strategies which can increase the accuracy of tapping depth with the trade off of greater wear on the tapping head clutch In tapping blind holes it is common practice to rough tap by machine and then clean the ATEO hole and the bottom the thread with a hand held tap or pneumatic power he
64. the precision of the computer generated spindle speed To improve spindle speed accuracy your computer needs to be calibrated to your PCNC 1100 The PCNC 1100 uses a printer port of a standard PC for its machine control The procedure described below will calibrate the PCNC 1100 to a specific computer The procedure should be repeated any time the machine control computer is replaced While the voltage test points accessed in this procedure are limited to low voltage signals the procedure does require access to the electrical cabinet while under power Other points within Figure 9 10 Detailed View of Test Points 30635 Rev C3 1 9 9 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 Appendices the cabinet will contain high voltage Exercise caution whenever doing electrical tests Only qualified electrical technicians should perform this calibration 1 Turn on the machine and control computer and then open the PCNC control software program 2 Turn the operator console Spindle Lockout key switch to the OFF 0 position This will prevent the spindle from starting It also isolates the spindle motor driver from high voltage 3 Turn the spindle control mode to MANUAL on the operator console Turn the manual spindle speed knob fully clockwise to the highest possible speed Do not start the spindle 4 Using a digital voltmeter set to measure DC voltage measure the voltage from S1 to S2 on the spindle motor driver figures 9 9 amp 9 10 Co
65. tool you are measuring into the Tool DRO and put the tool in the spindle e Click the Setup Tool Length button The tool will move and be sensed by the setter and its length relative to the master tool be entered in the tool table To set a plane as Z 0 0 with a given tool Sis 3 1500 Height inches e Load the tool in the spindle and put its number in the Tool DRO e Place the Tool Setter under the il A 1 tool on the surface to be made Z Iz 00 lt o a e Click the Setup Work Offset Figure 8 15 Tool setter button The tool will move down onto the setter and the work offset will be reset Notes a If the setter 1s not directly under the tool then the probing move will miss the setter and so continue until the tool hits the table or fixture If you see this happening trip the sensor by hand or use EStop to abort the move b You can use the Setup Work Offset button and the setter for tools held by a system like ER collets where you do not know the tool length You must set up the setter height correctly but then click Setup Work Offset whenever you change a tool In this case the tool length does not matter everything is done by the Z work offset You must not mix this method of working for some tools with using the tool table for others because of the differing use of the work offsets in the two methods Comprehensive X Y Probing The simple X Y probing screen is designed so that the one click
66. you have the gib adjusted correctly tighten up the lower gib screw to lock the gib plate in place and replace the Z axis protective cover Note The gib plate is tapered down It can wedge in place jamming the motion if the lower gib screw is left loose when the head is moved up Always have the lower gib screw tightened when the head is moved up The head will never accelerate to a high speed moving down as long as the axis motor is attached and the wires remain connected to the axis driver in the cabinet This occurs because the motor acts as a generator during downward motion taking energy from the system It is interesting to note that the LED on the Z axis driver inside the control cabinet will glow dimly if the head drifts down under gravity with the machine off This is due to the electrical generation of the Z axis motor Warning The electrical energy generated is absorbed in the DC bus resistor If the Z axis driver were to be disconnected from the DC power supply then the LED on the Z axis driver will glow brightly until the driver goes over voltage and self destructs 9 5 5 Adjusting Ballscrew Thrust Bearing Preload Bearing Pair Bearing Adjustment Nuts Ballscrew my 4 1 i j SSI ERE The tte BPa ia E es parres ENEE eae Motor A Figure 9 1 Section view of X axis mount If the Bearing Adjustment Nuts are not set properly then there will be either excessive backlash in the machine to
67. 0 All axis words are optional The path is made by a traverse move from the current position to the programmed position followed by a traverse move to the home position If no axis words are programmed the intermediate point is the current point only one move is made Reference Axes G28 1 Program G28 1 X Y Z A toreference the given axes The axes will move at the current feed rate towards the home switch es as defined by the Configuration When the absolute machine coordinate reaches the value given by an axis word then the feed rate 1s set to that defined by Configure gt Config Referencing Provided the current absolute position 1s approximately correct then this will give a soft stop onto the reference switch es Straight Probe G31 Straight Probe Command Program G31 X Y Z A to perform a straight probe operation The rotational axis words are allowed but it is better to omit them If rotational axis words are used the numbers must be the same as the current position numbers so that the rotational axes do not move The linear axis words are optional except that at least one of them must be used The tool in the spindle must be a probe It is an error if e The current point is less than 0 01 inch 0 254 millimeter from the programmed point e G31 is used in inverse time feed rate mode e Any rotational axis is commanded to move e No X Y or Z axis word is used In response to this command the machine
68. 00 po 4 5000 Zero Touch 0 000 4 Ref X Y coord 0 0000 0 0000 0 000 applied with G41 42 Y 0 0000 Zero Touch Ref Y Z coord 2 0000 0 0000 0 0000 2 000 Z 0 0000 Zero Touch Length Touch RefZ Acoord 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 A 0 0000 Zero l Touch Goto Tool Change Home key Ref XYZ l Ref A Do not update by typing new value Ctr H Go Home Switches l into offse i isinuse Touch 0 to offset DRO if 652 692 Cenacii n 0 000 Gauge Block thickness etc On Off E Alt T Figure 5 19 Offsets control family Using Tormach PCNC 1100 5 12 30625 Rev C3 1 5 2 2 9 5 2 2 10 5 2 2 11 Machine controls software SheetCAM works in a slightly different way as it will reload the G code as soon as you run its post processor function and you do not need to close SheetCAM down This allows very efficient fine tuning of the machining process Work Offset and Tool Table Control Family This family 1s explained in detail in Chapter 6 figure 5 19 MDI and Teach Control Family G code lines blocks can be entered for immediate execution into the MDI Manual Data Input line This is selected by clicking in it or the MDI hotkey Enter When the MDI line is active its color changes and a fly out box showing the recently entered commands is displayed figure 5 20 The cursor up and down arrow keys can be used to select from the fly out so that you can reuse a line that you have already entered The Enter key
69. 1 to 5214 program G92 3 You can set axis offsets in one program and use the same offsets in another program by programming G92 in the first program This will set parameters 5211 to 5214 Do not use Using Tormach PCNC 1100 7 26 30625 Rev C3 1 7 7 26 1 1 27 7 8 7 8 1 Programming language reference G92 1 in the remainder of the first program The parameter values will be saved when the first program exits and restored when the second one starts up Use G92 3 near the beginning of the second program That will restore the offsets saved in the first program Feed Rate Mode G93 G94 and G95 Three feed rate modes are recognized inverse time units per minute and units per revolution of spindle Program G93 to start the inverse time mode this is very infrequently employed Program G94 to start the units per minute mode Program G95 to start the units per rev mode In inverse time feed rate mode an F word means the move should be completed in one divided by the F number minutes For example 1f the F number is 2 0 the move should be completed in half a minute In units per minute feed rate mode an F word on the line 1s interpreted to mean the controlled point should move at a certain number of inches per minute millimeters per minute or degrees per minute depending upon what length units are being used and which axis or axes are moving In units per rev feed rate mode an F word on the line is interpreted to mean th
70. 2 X Y Z A where the axis words contain the offsets you want to provide All axis words are optional except that at least one must be used If an axis word is not used for a given axis the coordinate on that axis of the current point is not changed It is an error 1f all axis words are omitted G52 and G92 use common internal mechanisms in the CS and may not be used together When G52 is executed the origin of the currently active coordinate system moves by the values given The effect of G52 is cancelled by programming G52 X0 YO etc Here is an example Suppose the current point is at X 4 in the currently specified coordinate system then G52 X7 sets the X axis offset to 7 and so causes the X coordinate of the current point to be 3 The axis offsets are always used when motion is specified in absolute distance mode using any of the fixture coordinate systems Thus all fixture coordinate systems are affected by G52 7 7 17 Move in Absolute Coordinates G53 For linear motion to a point expressed in absolute coordinates program G1 G53 X Y Z A or similarly with GO instead of G1 where all the axis words are optional except that at least one must be used The GO or Gl is optional if it is in the current motion mode G53 is not modal and must be programmed on each line on which it is intended to be active This will produce coordinated linear motion to the programmed point If G1 is active the speed of motion is the current fe
71. 214 are set to the X Y Z A axis offsets The offset for an axis is the amount the origin must be moved so that the coordinate of the controlled point on the axis has the specified value Here is an example Suppose the current point is at X 4 in the currently specified coordinate system and the current X axis offset is zero then G92 X7 sets the X axis offset to 3 sets parameter 5211 to 3 and causes the X coordinate of the current point to be 7 The axis offsets are always used when motion is specified in absolute distance mode using any of the fixture coordinate systems Thus all fixture coordinate systems are affected by G92 Being in incremental distance mode has no effect on the action of G92 Non zero offsets may already be in effect when the G92 is called They are in effect discarded before the new value is applied Mathematically the new value of each offset is A B where A is what the offset would be if the old offset were zero and B 1s the old offset For example after the previous example the X value of the current point is 7 If G92 X9 is then programmed the new X axis offset is 5 which is calculated by 7 9 3 Put another way the G92 X9 produces the same offset whatever G92 offset was already in place To reset axis offsets to zero program G92 1 or G92 2 G92 1 sets parameters 5211 to 5214 to zero Whereas G92 2 leaves their current values alone To set the axis offset values to the values given in parameters 521
72. 4 9 5 IV Ae ANC santo 9 4 Oe POLO OO RUS is 9 4 Da A PP a PEO OO PO EI A 9 4 A AEEA 9 5 DO PERS Id SM eddie 9 5 9 5 5 Adjusting Ballscrew Thrust Bearing Preload ooooncccoccnnoocnnoncnnnonccnonocnnonccnnnncnnononnnns 9 6 9 5 5 1 Understanding Preloaded Angular Contact Bearings ccocooccnconcnncncnnnnncnnononnnonccnnnnos 9 7 Din Making the A Us Grado dd adaa a 9 8 O50 Speed CaM Vl AMON airis tirar 9 9 9 5 7 Using a Non standard Printer Port oooccccoccnccocnnononnnoncnnnnncnnoncnnnnncnnonnnnnnncnnnnnnnonnnnnnnss 9 11 o MONON CS OO UII nr dnde 9 13 nl VRC CIMA CAN rosca 9 13 A heres tune tenseahe se netunatenansie a citseasecssieayes 9 14 9 6 Preparation tor Transpor l wesccciciecssscccesceccciavesc ceseccaceuaweccsceeuciscsdasecssieavescestesocescavesiesooss 9 14 9 7 Disassembly for Trans AAA 9 15 10 A o AAPP nnmnnn 15 10 1 APpendix A INOUE USO soni oucensscousocsssaucatuaccesceusnsesecscceussess seusenescsesce 15 10 2 Appendix 2 Exploded Parts Views x sccsssscssssossssscssscovsssscssssovessscssssovessscnsssovesssossssoss 15 10 3 Appendix 3 Optimization of Windows XP cccsscccsssccssssccssscccsssccsssccsssccsssscessscees 25 10 3 1 Remove Unnecessary Services and Startup Programs oocccooccncncnnncncnnonnnnnoncnnnnncnnonacnnoncnnnns 25 10 5 2 Disable Power Miata semen Lantana dai posaba casaca eras 26 10 33 Disable Automatic Updates sana 26 10 3 4 Set Computer to Standard PC no
73. 4 G54 G49 G99 GH G97 Xx 0 0000 Y 0 0000 All buttons move in Z direction to touch the probe sensor then set the data ip Z 0 0000 i A Fool 99 y i Ha Override E100 L sog norr cubana mares probe a PTS CSP CNC3GCode TormachXmasAnnotated tap before move E PCONC M3 R27 SRev6 23 Clear Merry Christmas G Codes M Codes Simple Fun CU ARA Comp Rue ana MDI ana tocan ama Ofisots ANS d Senings ANS J Diagnostics AKT XY Probe CH As s Z Probe AND J Figure 8 13 Z Probing screen 8 6 30625 Rev C3 1 Machine upgrades and configuration probe input The yellow buttons perform machine moves and set offsets Depending on the button these will be the Z offset in the current work offsets or the length of a tool Important If the probe or tool setter is not properly connected then the Control Software will keep moving even when the probe touches or the setter 1s touched This can cause the probe tip to be crushed or the cutting edges of the probing tool to be chipped on the carbide top of the setter the PCNC is very powerful Each time that you connect up the probe or tool setter you should ji PE T check that the screen LED marked Test probe before use lights when you gently displace the tip i A or cap The red lights in the device will illuminate hos i a too but the screen LED is a more complete test Tool 991 F We strongly recommend use of the Jog Shuttle _ l ength a aai co
74. 5 Rev C3 1 3 3 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 3 3 3 3 3 4 Making your first part coordinates and your coordinates is called the Work Offset Note We are going to cut this part by giving you a recipe You will learn why and how it works later Please don t add anything extra to the recipe Adding yeast to a soda bread recipe makes a fine mess For example here you should have the length of each tool in the tool table still set to zero You are now ready to run the program an ards Cutting in Air Click the Cycle Start button The PCNC will start running but almost immediately ask for tool number 1 This is already loaded so just click Cycle Start again The machine will trace the letters PCNC in the air It does this four times because they are to be cut 0 2 deep and the program is designed only to cut 0 05 each time This is conservative but runs no risk of breaking the 44 diameter tool Regenerate Toolpath Jog Follow E Display Mode The toolpath shows the tool as it moves Figure 3 7 Toolpath during a cut by a different colored line figure 3 7 After cutting the letters the machine will stop and ask for tool number 2 Jog the Z axis up a few inches so you can put the 1 2 cutter into the tool holder Then jog down to about 2 above the material and type the value O into the Z DRO Do not forget to press Enter to accept the value Now click Cycle Start again The machine will use a spiral path to cu
75. 59 999 degrees If the arc is helical the value of the end point of the arc on the coordinate axis parallel to the axis of the helix is also specified It is an error if e Both of the axis words for the axes of the selected plane are omitted 30635 Rev C3 1 7 13 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 7 7 3 2 Programming language reference e NoR word is given e The end point of the arc is the same as the current point It is not good practice to program radius format arcs that are nearly full circles or are semicircles or nearly semicircles because a small change in the location of the end point will produce a much larger change in the location of the center of the circle and hence the middle of the arc The magnification effect is large enough that rounding error in a number can produce out of tolerance cuts Nearly full circles are outrageously bad semicircles and nearly so are only very bad Other size arcs in the range tiny to 165 degrees or 195 to 345 degrees are OK Here is an example of a radius format command to mill an arc GLF COA a Xe dle De R ANA O That means to make a clockwise as viewed from the positive Z axis circular or helical arc whose axis is parallel to the Z axis ending where X 1 0 Y 1 5 and Z 0 5 with a radius of 2 0 If the starting value of Z is 0 5 this is an arc of a circle parallel to the X Y plane otherwise it is a helical arc Center Format Arc In the center format the coordinates of the end p
76. 625 Rev C3 1 Machine upgrades and configuration the part Obviously two things are necessary The probe must be plugged in to the socket on the PCNC control panel and hence be connected to the computer and the Z height must be low enough so the probe tip will actually touch the work Important If the probe is not properly connected then the Control Software will keep moving even when the probe touches the work This can cause it to be bent Each time that you connect up the probe you should check that the screen LED marked Test probe before use lights when you gently displace the tip The red lights in the probe will illuminate too but the screen LED is a more complete test Ple Corfig Yew Wizsrds Operator Help Mil gt 615 G10 G17 640 G20 690 GM GH 649 699 G64 697 x 0 0000 F 6 00 YS 0 0000l Eran Z _ 0 0000 9050sto 10 0009 va may Reo vemo buttons move probe and set work wen Test probe H before move For detailed manu control of ArODINg to Comp Probing Ana j Ed EE RESET CA PCNC3 GCode T ormachXmasAnnotated lap a _Cloas Merry Christmas G Codes mcodes Sviermcuana Comp Runan morang toomamana offers ahs Senings Ait Diagnostics az XY Probe carsi Z Probe Ang l Figure 8 10 Simple XY Probing PONC M3 R27 SRerh 73 We strongly recommend use of the Jog Shuttle controller for jogging the probe position because it combines precision with speed If you hi
77. 7 Optional Stop acto Ossa 7 4 Optional Stop Witch lindas 5 11 Order of G code items on line ccccooccnncc 7 9 Override for feed and speed disabling 7 4 Override feed and speed controlled by M48 M49 cc ceccccceseeeeeeeeeees 7 29 P Parameter AE N 7 8 AER ne e eE eaters 7 7 Parameters PP CACTI deseen a a Ee 7 5 Part program repeating indefinitely M47 7 29 repeating indefinitely M99 cccceeeeeeees 7 30 running controls family o O 5 10 Part program making with Wizards cccsecccseeeeeseeeeeeeeees 4 9 Pause DUON dd 5 10 PCNC Choosing location Ob errira i 2 1 computer requirements ooccccoccnncnccnnononnnoncnnnnnss 2 7 connecting to control computer ooccco o 2 11 control panel ds 5 1 control panel controls explained 2 12 fourth axis OPLION coooccccooccnoncnnnonconononnnonccnnnoss 8 1 Operators DML id 5 1 receiving and unpacking ooooccccoocnnoncnnnnnocs 2 4 tool ChanglNg ooocccooccncnccnnoncnnononnnoncnnonacnnnnoos 5 3 PCNC computer mounting arrangements 2 3 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 Appendices PENE CONCEDE nssr 1 3 Peck drilling canned cycle OO EAE ETE EA ATTENTA 7 24 Peck drilling canned cycle high speed CEEE EEIE E EET PE TATNA 7 21 Pendant JOS SINS euena aena nA 5 16 Performance expectations cooocccooccnconcnnononnnoncnnnns 1 3 Plane selection G17
78. CC UAC Mun ts als as sais dadas 6 4 6 3 Seine Work OMSEUS sas AS 6 5 O Drect ENT TOAS DR O AAA A E E A 6 5 Oa WISIN he TOUCH ISULLONS oeae E E AEA 6 5 Oo PPP 6 5 Coe E ODE E ACTO 6 6 A ie AAPP 6 6 03 09 Laset Centering Tec Ques secs santana dla eias 6 6 6 4 TOOL OMS ari AAA ERA EA RAR AA 6 7 Orc Tormach Tools System aia 6 7 A AC A 6 7 6 4 3 Master Tool and Numbering Tool idad 6 9 04A UsmetheProbocand Tool SCU seriei n a a A A a Ea 6 10 64 5 Tool Length Offsets with TIS ue it ida tada tdi da ii 6 10 6 4 6 Tool Length Offsets with General ToolINg oooccooocccoocnnconcnnonccnnnncnnonccnnoncnnonncnnoncnnonoss 6 11 6 4 7 Comments on Tool OfTS tS ooccoooccncoocnnnoonnnoncnnnnncnnoncnnnonnonononnnnnnononnnnnoncnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnss 6 11 6 5 Multiple Work Origins asssssscesccescccscesesdsnccente saccensdansssseeesessacdenseanessassaasdasccents agseasdascccends 6 12 OL SAV ORC OM E npm oie 6 12 002 Ole Works dicos dicas door 6 12 6 6 Cutter Diameter COMPENSatlON soiissisesssedsscsadeassassiedadeosseavseussecessessealdeuseesssoabsees a seo 6 12 66l CAD CAM and W1iZat Si ii ic 6 12 6 6 2 Control Software Compensation ic cone tein ia 6 12 05 IWO KINdOS OL COMO 6 13 6 6 3 1 Material Edge Contour A A it 6 13 6 60 32 Toolpath Conti A A AA ee aad 6 14 7 Part programming Language Reference scccssssesseseeeeeseeeeees 7 1 7 1 DENNIS A A A AAA AAA A AN 7 1 A A 0 010 E A ne nen nen yen eee Een Somme ee mney ren
79. CNC table For many jobs it is worth putting a layer of scrap material under the work This will protect the table when through holes are to be cut and may save damage in the event of a mistake in the part program or in operating the machine Put a 14 diameter tool into a tool holder in the spindle Ensure the lower spindle pulleys are selected on the machine and are set on the screen using the Hi Lo button Use masking tape to indicate a 5 length near the middle This length must be clear of the clamps Setting Work Offsets Jog the axes so that the tool is just above the material at the top left hand corner of the 5 section figure 3 6 We suggest that you do a dummy run cutting in the air so jog the Z axis up about two inches Now click in the X Y and Z axis if DROs in turn and type the value O into ards each of them Do not forget to press Enter to accept the values The reason for doing this is that you want the position of the tool 1 e at the top left of your material and an inch above it to be X 0 Y O and Z 0 The Control Software still refers to the home switches as zero internally but lets you have your own separate coordinate system for the work If you click the Machine Coords button then you will be shown how your zero relates to the home position The Regenerate Toolpath Jog Follow Display Mode difference between the machine Figure 3 7 Toolpath during a cut 3063
80. Choosing Software Work Offsets Note This is different from the Mach2 based version of the Control Software which always initialized G54 offsets to a fixed usually zero value Cutter Diameter Compensation CAD CAM and Wizards We have shown how it is necessary to allow for the diameter of the tool when cutting around an object or cutting out a pocket You are strongly advised to do this by your CAD CAM software or the Wizard which generates the part program The advantage of it being done this way 1s that the software has knowledge of the future path of the tool so can avoid overshooting on sharp inside corners You are unlikely to need to read the remainder of this chapter Control Software Compensation The Control Software does however implement compensation for the tool diameter using G41 and G42 This section describes how this works In industrial applications this is aimed at allowing for a cutter which through regrinding is not exactly the diameter of the tool assumed when the part program was written The compensation can be enabled by the machine operator rather than requiring the production of another part program Using Tormach PCNC 1100 6 12 30625 Rev C3 1 6 6 3 6 6 3 1 Offsets Of the face of it the problem should be easy to solve All you need to do is to offset the controlled point by an appropriate X and Y to allow for the tool radius Simple trigonometry gives the distances depending on the angle the direction
81. Driver 30684 J4 cable computer 30162 Machine Control Board 30685 J3 cable console 30171 On Off Rocker 30686 J6 cable axis drivers Limit and Guard Switches August 2007 X limit PN 30742 all machines PN 30535 machine number 75 and earlier Later machines use PN 30461 for Y limit switch only PN 30536 for switch and welded enclosure mount Z limit PN 30461 all machines Spindle Door PN 30461 on machine number 220 and earlier PN 30577 on all later machines 30461 Roller switch identified as 2 x 1 75 x 0 75 plastic and metal 30535 Roller switch identified as painted metal body 2 x 2 x 3 75 30577 Push switch identified as plated metal body 2 x 2 75 x 0 75 30742 Roller switch Metric size is 10x38 mm 15A Use Bussmann KTK 15 Littlefuse KLK 15 or Ferraz ATM 15 3 Metric size is 10x38 mm 6A Use Bussmann KTK 6 Littlefuse KLK 6 or Ferraz ATM 6 19 Metric size is 10x38 mm 0 6A Use Bussmann KTK 6 10 Llttlefuse KLK 6 or Ferraz ATM 0 6 PCNC 1100 30204 Electrical Overview December 2007 D40135C Wiring Diagram 3 digit serial numbers LABEL COOLANT POWER LABEL COMPUTER LABEL COMPUTER MONITOR Ribbon cable connects J4 to DB25 connection is made to computer POWER INLET OUTLET OUTLET OUTLET El DB25 MALE 1 1 0000000000000 00000000000 A A a ee ee P ie ee ee E oat ee penen sw6 COOLANT SW5 r J 206 COMPUTER Lt _ J L o i 202 204
82. EEE E 5 7 Tale OVET cinin ER 5 7 Step selected by Ctrl key ooooccccoooc o 5 8 with Tormach Jog Shuttle Controller 5 8 B Base assembly exploded VieW seccceseeeeeeees 5 Bearings ballscrew adjustment of preload coooocccooccnonocnnoncnnnnos 9 5 Binary operations A aE 7 7 Block ROM AL Ol COME AA 7 5 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 Block Delete A A E nate ened Block delete switch oocococcncnocncnccncnncnncnos Blue Screen of Death ACTION to avoid cece eee eeceseececcecescesescecensescuses Boring and reaming canned cycle Cabinet stadd ooocccooncnncnnoccnnnnoccnnnnnccnnnnnccncnnanonos CAD 2d 2 Y2D and 3D explalmed ooocccoocncnnccnc CAD CAM software what to LOOK TOP esetet aaa Calculator leeds ANS Speeds mareado Cancel modal motion EEan a E E E Canned cycle return level E nn A TT AMIE CCV CIES paa EN in between MOTION ooccccoccncnncnnnncnncnncnnoncnnnnnos preliminary MOTION coooccccncnncncnnnoncnnnncnnnnnooos repeats by L word ccoooccccnccncnccnnoncnncnnnnnnnnoss retract defined by R Word oocccooccccoccncooo sticky numbers ooooccccooccncnccnnnncononocononccnnnnnnos Center Tormat at succour Centering microscope methodS oooccccoocnco Circular pocket GOLGI dans Code definition syntax explained oooccccocc Column and head assembly oo cooooco oooo Comments A E Comp
83. F R O 6 00 DRO The control software will aim to use this speed as the actual rate of the coordinated 6 Ol movement of the tool through the material If this rate 1s not possible because of the maximum M410 A J OF i i FIO qr 100 F11 permitted speed of any axis then the actual feed rate will be the highest achievable figure 5 14 Figure 5 14 Feed control family As modern cutters are often specified by the permitted cut per tip it may be convenient to specify the feed per revolution 1 e feed per tip X number of tips on tool In this case the F DRO gives the feed rate in current units inches millimeters per rev of the spindle It is set by the F word in a part program or by typing into the DRO Notice that the numeric values in the control will be very different unless spindle speed is near to 1 rpm So using a feed per minute figure with feed per rev mode will probably produce a disastrous crash Feed Display The actual feed in operation allowing for the coordinated motion of all axes is displayed in Units min and Units rev If the spindle speed is not set and the actual spindle speed is not measured then the Feed per rev value will be meaningless Feed Override Unless M49 disable feed rate override is in use the feed rate can be manually overridden in the range 20 to 299 by entering a percentage in the DRO This value can be nudged in steps of 10 with the buttons or their keyboard shortcuts and be r
84. Figure 2 1 An example mounting on stand 30635 Rev C3 1 2 1 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 Preparation a dimensional outline With manual milling many people are accustom to dry cutting clearing chips with a small brush as they go With CNC you have a whole new world open to you In many cases you may turn the majority of the stock into chips cutting a shape out of a solid block of metal the way Michelangelo would cut a sculpture from a block of marble Unless you are limiting yourself to cutting cast iron wood printed circuit boards or certain other materials you will probably want a coolant system on your machine Mist coolant can be effective for keeping your cutting tools cool but it does little for clearing chips Flood coolant will cool the cutting tools while clearing chips but is more challenging to contain The table of the PCNC has drain slots and a hole tapped for a pipe fitting to allow coolant collection as is common on most small mills Nevertheless CNC machining operations commonly produce so many chips that you simply cannot keep the table drain running At times you may need a coolant flow that is simply too much for the table drain The little drain tray that is common under manual machines or the open frame setup of a Bridgeport style knee mill just does not make it We strongly recommend that you plan your setup with a full motion tray such that coolant will be captured as it overflows the machine table within the full oper
85. G code execution will stop the Tool Set Abs IJ Set Inc li 1 Incremental Change LED will flash and you Try changing Wi Mode if arcs displaycut as large circles need to press Cycle Start to continue Tool change requests Figure 5 29 Misc settings can be ignored by clicking the Ignore M6 Tool Change button This can be useful when air cutting to prove time a part program G73 Pullback This DRO defines the distance that a high speed peck drill cycle G73 will pullback when breaking the chip You may need to alter this value for metric use IJ Mode The IJ mode defines how the I J and K words in a G02 or G03 are interpreted There is no standard for this so different CAM post processors will use different conventions The PCNC 1100 usually runs with I J and K being incremental distances from the current point You can make the Control Software treat them as absolute positions by clicking the Set Abs J button The symptoms of an incorrect setting are that small arcs can display a massive circle on the toolpath or you get an error message about the radius of an arc being different at the start and end of a cut USB Jogging Pendants Optional accessories purchased by many users are the USB jogging pendants These provide access to the main axis jogging controls on a unit that can be positioned for use while touching off the tool position They are not resistant to coolant and for safety reasons do not have controls for starting
86. It is internally pulled up to 5 volts in the PCNC The input is active on when this is pulled to ground Thus by jumpering 4 to 5 and you will see the probe LED change on the Diagnostics screen Using Tormach PCNC 1100 8 12 30625 Rev C3 1 8 3 Machine upgrades and configuration Auto reverse tapping The control software supports auto reverse tapping heads supplied as accessories to the PCNC PN 30612 ranges from 0 to 4 threads and PN 30613 covers 8 to 2 The DROs on the Settings screen are used to define the head in use and thread pitch The actual threading commands M871 M872 M873 and M874 are described in chapter 7 This section gives brief instructions of fitting the heads to the machine and installing a tap Both tapping heads are supplied with the Tormach Tooling System geometry whose 34 shank can be mounted like any other tool Figure 8 23 shows the large head EZ iif i IIIDA fitted in the spindle The pOEQUE see Figure 8 23 Large tapping head ready for use can be seen engaged in the recess in the head casting to prevent rotation on the fixed part of the mechanism Tapping will generally be performed between 500 and 900 RPM so the drive should be set to the low speed pulleys The tap is held by a rubberflex collet locked by the nut on the nose of the head spindle and prevented from rotating in the head by using its squared end The small head accepts a fixed square but the larger head which
87. Labor 200 Constitution Avenue NW Washington DC 20210 1 1 4 Safety Precautions 1 Do not run this machine without knowing the function of every control key button knob or handle Refer to the manual or contact Tormach if any function is not understood 2 Protect your eyes Wear approved safety glasses with side shields at all times You should never use compressed air to remove chips or to clean the machine An air blast will often launch a metal chip into a place it should not be 3 Avoid moving parts Before operating this machine remove all jewellery including watches and rings neckties and any loose fitting clothing 4 Keep your hair away from moving parts 5 Take off gloves before you operate the machine Gloves are easily caught in moving parts or cutting tools 6 Never operate with unbalanced tooling or spindle fixtures 7 Remove all tools wrenches chuck keys etc from the spindle and machine surface before you begin Loose items can become dangerous flying projectiles 8 Use adequate work clamping Do not allow your work piece to become a projectile 9 Never operate a milling machine after consuming alcoholic beverages or taking strong medication 10 Protect your hands Stop the machine spindle and ensure that the computer control is stopped before you e Change tools e Change parts or adjust the work piece e Change the belt pulley position e Clear away chips oil or coolant always use a chi
88. P l1 el r 4 FU3 0 6 AMP i i Lineint AEMT i _ OO O O i 101 102 230 VAC LINE f 0 Line In 2 Y 2 EET 100 E 3 FU2 15 AMP 230 120 PRIMARY SECONDARY 230 VA DISCONNECT CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER FILTER MACHINE FRAME BONDED TO EARTH GROUND L23 L13 230 48 PRIMARY SECONDARY DC BUS POWER C1 L24 L25 l L26 C2 L14 XMF2 CAP 15 000 uF _ L16 C1 300 ooo lit li AAA FUTURE ADDITION A DRIVE 1 PN 30589 A Be e 5 E2 to J1 3 O 0 E1 to J1 4 i 2 er P2 1 3324 S1 to J1 2 ert DIR to Jt 6 ee EN J1 4 jumpered to J1 5 eb P1 P2 5 322 _ Pi P2 6 E eee 30541 uN J6 19 thru J6 24 A Note off lt on gt on gt off off off off on gt SWITCH SETTINGS FOR AXIS DRIVER 30541 ON X Y Z AND 8 ROTARY TABLE SWITCH SETTINGS FOR AXIS DRIVER 30541 ON 6 ROTARY TABLE Ribbon cable connects J4 to DB25 connector on cabinet External connection is made to computer LABEL COOLANT POWER LABEL COMPUTER LABEL COMPUTER MONITOR OUTLET OUTLET E q DB25 MALE 1O MOUNT PLATE 1 1 0000000000000 30210 Sul L AAA A E ee ia lc ee ij COOLANT SW5 oe aerea 206 l COMPUTER 204 f7 203 gt gt E 202 7 202 4o f L E OoOo i 202 FU4 7 AMP FU5 1 AMP KEY SWITCH renee jDISABLE BELT GUARD 103 Tormach Machine Control Board di
89. RO described tilda td 5 10 Line number O Ocaso 7 5 Linear axes A E AES 7 1 Linear feedrate move 30625 Rev C3 1 Appendices UI aA 7 13 Cocation or machhe ell 2 1 Location to give Salety ooooccccoccncnncnnononnnoncnnnns 2 2 Locking O A E nent RTT rarer tte 5 3 Loop control tamil essani 5 13 M MOO program stop ooccccoccnnonccnonocnnonccnonacnnononos 7 27 MO1 optional program Stop cccccseeeeeeeeees 7 27 MO2 proram endo ea 7 28 MO3 spindle clockwise ooocccoocccooocnconooo 7 28 M04 spindle counterclockwise cooooooooooo 7 28 MOS StOp spindle cerieisa 7 28 MO7 mist coolant 0N oocccooccccoccnconcnnonocnnononos 7 29 MOS flood coolant 0N coooccccoocnconcnnnnocnnnnooo 7 29 MO9 Sal COOlanit Off srono 7 29 M30 program end coocoooccccnccnncncnnoncnnnoncnnononnnonnos 7 28 M48 feed and speed override On 00068 7 29 M49 feed and speed override off 7 29 M871 tapping canned Cycles oooocccoonccnncnncns 7 30 M87x tapping canned Cycles coooocccoocnnoncnnnno 7 30 M98 subroutine call ooooccnnconcnnnnnnccno 7 29 M99 subroutine return cooooccnncnncnnncnncnnnnnnnnnnnns 7 30 Machine coordinates displaying on axis DROS oocccconccncnccnnoncnnnnns 5 7 AN o O 7 20 Machine modes ce 7 9 Machme ON LEDs id dd 2 13 Macro M CODES did daria 7 30 Macros Overview on WEIS iii
90. The DROs can however be switched to display Absolute Machine Coordinates Ferd sea XS 4 5000 f nx saa YE 0 0000 sua Z 0 0000 a sex AS 0 0000 aa ia Machine Coords Ref XYZ J 0000 7 De Ref all If the X and Y coordinates display in red then they have been rorated by a G68 command Figure 5 10 Axis control family You can type a new value into an Axis DRO This will modify the current Work Offset to make the controlled point in the current coordinate system be the value you have set You are advised to set up Work Offsets using the Offsets screen until you are fully familiar with working with multiple coordinate systems Referenced The LED is green if the axis has been referenced 1 e is in a known actual position You should always run the PCNC in the referenced state Using Tormach PCNC 1100 5 6 30625 Rev C3 1 Machine controls Each axis can be referenced using its Ref button or the linear axes can be referenced together using the Ref XYZ button The De Ref All button does not move the axes but stops them being in the referenced state Machine Coordinates Scale The Machine Coords button displays absolute machine coordinates The tall LED warns that absolute coordinates are being displayed Scale factors for any axes can be set by G51 and can be cleared by G50 If a scale factor other than 1 0 is set then it is applied to coordinates when they appear in G code e g as X words Y wo
91. The M01 Break button toggles the Optional Stop switch If enabled then the M01 command will be treated as MOO Goto Toolchange This button provides manual movement of the controlled point when the part program is stopped Tool Details Controls display the current tool its name the offsets for its length and diameter and on systems with a Digitizer input allow it to be automatically zero to the Z plane Unless tool change requests are being ignored on encountering an M6 the Control Software will stop and flash the Change Req LED You continue after changing the tool by clicking Cycle Start Work Offset Details The name of the current work offset coordinate system is displayed 5 2 2 7 Toolpath Control Family The currently loaded part program is displayed in the G code window The current line is highlighted and can be moved using the scroll bar on the window figure 5 16 The Toolpath display shows the path that the controlled point will follow in the X Y and Z planes When a part program is executing the path is over painted in green This over painting is dynamic and is not preserved when you change screens or indeed alter views of the toolpath On occasions you will find that the display does not exactly follow the planned path This occurs because the Control Software prioritizes the tasks it is doing Sending accurate step pulses to Regenerate Display Mode the machine tool is the first priority Dr
92. Tooling System and want to use its ability to preset tools off the PCNC machine If you have a TTS but are happy to set the tools in your PCNC then you can use the procedure in the next section to setup the lengths but still benefit from the ability to exchange tools very quickly If you have both TTS tools and conventional tool holders then you must mount your master tool in a TTS holder or must set up the lengths of all tools using the procedure of the next section Fit the tools in their TTS holders and number them Zero the dial on the TTS height gauge onto the face of the surface plate by rotating its bezel Measure the height from the surface plate of the Master Tool and write this on the paper as Actual Master Tool Length AMTL Work in inches even if you will run the mill with metric tools and G code Now put each tool in turn into the dummy spindle and use the height gauge to measure its length Figure 6 19 shows this being done with an end mill Enter the number description diameter and the measured length of each tool minus AMTL onto your paper table The Relative Length will always be a negative number if your master tool is the longest When this is completed go to the Offsets screen of the Control Software and click the Edit Save table Now button above the T DRO Notice there is a similar button above the Work Offset column do not use this one Enter the data from your paper table into the similar one on the screen The
93. Tweak program and open the PCNC3 profile details in section 9 5 6 above and enter this number under the Printer Port heading figure 9 15 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 9 12 30625 Rev C3 1 9 5 8 9 5 8 1 Machine upgrades and configuration Troubleshooting Mechanical The mechanical design and assembly is conventional in all aspects Adjustments should be simple to make but rarely needed The exploded views are your primary resource for understanding assembly and adjustment We encourage you to contact Tormach if additional information is needed Specific items to be aware of include the following The Z axis is held up by the Z axis ballscrew and motor Decoupling the motor will result in a dangerous and destructive fall with the entire spindle head crashing into the table X Y and Z axis ballscrews are mounted on angular contact bearings The preload adjustment on these bearings affects the axis backlash and bearing wear Spanner wrenches are very helpful to adjusting the locknuts and setting the tension Tormach offers the correct spanner wrenches PN 30485 if you need to adjust or replace these bearings X Y and Z axis ballscrew nuts are preloaded using precision ground spacers These are factory set and cannot be adjusted X Y and Z axis slide ways each have a tapered gib plate locked in place at each end Tapered gibs can act as wedges and jam the machine if the lock screws are not tight When correctly
94. UR O A 2 9 Testi he Mesta ON soap U Do aii ere ret renter ttre 2 10 Driver Test After a Software Crash sicicsscsscssascosasaeavanacsasacaascinsanncsesnoerasanaeaassumaesasaaas 2 11 Manual Driver Installation and Un installatiON coooccccoccnnnocnnnnonnnoncnnnnnnnnoncnnnns 2 11 Ronnie the PONG issan 2 11 Mam Switch and Control Panel uri dt ld 2 12 Changing the Spindle Speed Range ooccoocccconccncnccnnoncnnononononccnonncnnonccnnnnnononcnnnnnnnnonnnnnnoss 2 14 Computer Control of the Spindle and Coolant coooccccnocnncnonnnnncnnononnnoncnnnnncnnonannnnnnonnns 2 14 MDI for Entering G and M code ComMmMandS occccooccnncnnccnncnicnnnnnnncnnonancnnonancnnonnnrononnnononns 2 15 Contents o A ra AO CLS eevee Meee er Eee y E ern 2 15 2 9 SOMAT y ororena EEEN EAA ESE EE SES 2 16 3 Making Your First Part ccccccssecsesseeseeeseeeeseeeseeseeeaseonseneaeeeneeonees 3 1 3 1 Coordinates daa iii 3 1 SEFE REMC RETCTING e Ma INC soit stat ate a ct ade aa d cis 3 1 3 2 Loading a Demonstration Program ssecssecssccsscesseecseocseccseecssecseecsseccseccseosseecssecsseosseo 3 2 3 3 Running the Demonstration Part program ssseccssssecossssecocsssecocsseecoosssecossssessosseesosse 3 3 Soest Y A assnsu see tases ao stsains E ea lode vasa Sealand navnse sau iacdia 3 3 52 gt DNE NOKOSET ee a ee ayer aaa anaes 3 3 54 0 EUA AI cee aia a a aa ee 3 4 S04 Cutanethe Actial Pat E bien ae aaa ias ee 3 4 E A Geta edule aca e
95. Using the Tormach PCNC 1100 Programmer s and Operator s Guide to the Personal CNC 1100 with Mach 3 Control 2005 6 7 Tormach LLC and J ohn Prentice Castlewood Consultants Questions or comments Please email us at PCNC 1100 Manual tech tormach com OR g Part Number 30625 Rev C3 1 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 li 30625 Rev C3 1 1 1 gt ee ef gt ee ee B OW Ne 1 2 1 3 1 3 1 1 3 2 1 3 3 1 4 1 5 2 1 2 1 1 212 2 1 3 2 1 4 2 2 2 2 1 22 2 2 3 2 4 2 4 1 2 4 2 2 4 3 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 7 1 P 2 7 3 2 8 2 8 1 2 8 2 2 8 3 2 8 4 2 4 1 1 2ZAN2 2 7 3 1 Zaz Zt ES 2 7 3 4 Bhad Contents AM E A E 1 1 A A AI 1 1 AA A PA 1 1 General Operating Salely nn N ianei an Tai haitiar iti ipraiieiiiainn 1 1 Safety PUBLICATIONS oooccccocnncoonnnoncnnonocnnoncnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnss 1 2 EI e Al ia Gs Orc NE LO 0 OOOO POP A nen E Eo E OE A 1 2 Personal NC CONCEPT vs ccceesccezeseeectcaeecoccsecetscipecesesnccceteedsccesectccentcetsusacecsncuntecieeesseteceees 1 3 Performance Expecl ations ss cc2scte oc ceapeccacus sesceuyetescndtesscanevenesdsctctees wenateseccusbeeeusaaveneechetctest 1 3 UBL ADI Yi n E T 1 3 Understandind FC CU Cy oie rE 1 4 Resolution Accuracy and Repeatability of the PCNC sseesseesseessensseessersssesssersserssersseess 1 4 Scope and Intellectual Property ssccessecssecccecccecsccosscosccocs
96. Y words specify the center about which the rotation is to be applied in the current coordinate system R is the angle of rotation in degrees with positive values being counter clockwise If X or Y are omitted then zero is assumed A and B can be used as synonyms for X and Y respectively To cancel rotation program G69 If a G68 is used while rotation is in operation a G69 is implied before it In other words successive G68s are not cumulative and the X and Y points are always in an un rotated system When a rotation is in use the X and Y axis DROs will be red to remind the operator that these values are program coordinate values which will be rotated This function can be used to compensate for work not exactly aligned on the table to rotate the operation of a part program if it is coded with Y travel greater than X and so the work will not fit on the table or as software vise soft jaws Note e G68 may only be used in the XY plane G17 mode e The effects of changing work offsets when a rotation transformation is in effect will be non intuitive so it is wiser not to program this Indeed care should be taken proving any program including transformations e There is very little standardization of the functions of this code across different CNC controls so careful checks should be made on code written for other machines e Jogging always takes place in the direction of the machine axes The toolpath display frame is oriented to the physi
97. a ert 7 1 Tek GS MIP TN OS veda rhe alot seine ce Aces A a a e S 7 1 Dede LI Pcl elaa th alet ad alag a oat eset ad cchnc a a S 7 1 pe be AA IN II A mee eee 7 1 Pelos Controlled POM Uae AA 7 1 LO Coordinated Emea Moon A Chau E acne 7 2 a A CCG IR AUG ay Sach hich arnt O A de Ce ht Cd oats 7 2 dalos A A sles inkce a E E 7 2 SA ates A Mears here cea EE allen Gotan dents crate bem E A E ate sunaseee 7 3 AMO e selena Os ee O 7 3 AN A A A endow ease aasa dent 7 3 30635 Rev C3 1 iii Using Tormach PCNC 1100 Contents TA CUERO lale epee a E err crn Teeter rn ere AEE ter rennet tre 7 3 TAS A AEE 7 3 IS SOO ARICA ae A EA sna es ticbatanac EE TEE AE EEEE 7 3 JLS PEC ONOM Ode Saen a a tes eran Sener eee 7 3 7 2 Interpreter Interaction with Controls esseecssecsseecseecseccseocseecscecssecssecoseccseosseecseecsseosseo 7 4 Tal Feedand speed Override Cont Ols cnu esate lancet ee eee 7 4 Te Block Delete Cota i Ol rss tia E T a eee ea 7 4 T29 Optional Prora stop COn ls AO 7 4 7 3 Tool Fil wsscccscisiccaiescdvsncusescosasevavedscasasedarssavetecasdsedaeacdsscosavssedawauevadssabasedavasecedesasssedseacessaenes 7 4 7 4 eta MAA 7 4 LA A A PEO E O O I E 7 4 Teed A Oo ats wien anaes AS 7 5 LAS EM deseo Es 7 5 7 5 Formatting Code Lines Block ccssccssssossssccsvscovsssccssesovsssccessvccsssccesssonsssccsessovessccssese 7 5 os EN oles geeewmeeernenn eer ce Terre Meet eer Vert notennte th vetee erenny en Tete ener Tren Tae este e
98. achine and to the computer coolant pump are both removed from the wall outlet Live parts may be exposed even when the main switch is in the off position Computer On Off Switch the main switch ON and switch the computer power on at the PCNC control panel figure 2 13 CNC YOO vi Figure 2 13 Control panel layout If your computer does not power up when power is applied to the cord you will have to press the computer s power on button Restart the computer and use the desktop shortcut PCNC M3 to run the Control Program figure 2 14 Opa Rocas es close Fas j Teo G80 G17 G40 G20 GAO 69 G55 G43 699 G64 697 A X 107 5171 eu pr 21 1239 ond Z 31 91721 uw _ Machine Coords EDN Aas wares VAR ee sser de This will allow you to perform all the important functions on the standard machine If you have the 4th axis or want to use G code features like Optional Stop then you may wish to use the Comprehensive Run screen figure 2 15 In this case click the Comp Run button to change the display SEO ANETO DY MIRS EI CPP o wate Selatan an PELA w PAS tas RESET pes pa Loaded PONG M3 R23 SReves Program Run Th Light Emitti e screen Light Emitting r r SS ee ee a oii ee ee Diodes LEDs in this manual by the Reset button will be flashing as will the Machine OK LED Figure 2 14 Simple main screen Now returning to the operator s panel
99. acy you will be able to achieve in your own work While a machine tool may seem absolutely rigid the truth of the matter is that everything has some elasticity Related to elasticity is the compressibility of components such as ball nuts and bearings Preloading of bearings and ballscrews can remove the physical open space between moving parts but the technique cannot eliminate compressibility The key to achieving maximum accuracy is understanding and controlling the magnitude and direction of forces Maximum accuracy is achieved when the forces are minimized as occurs in a finishing cut Maximum repeatability is achieved when the forces are repeatable both in magnitude and direction Using Tormach PCNC 1100 6 4 30625 Rev C3 1 6 3 6 3 1 6 3 2 6 3 3 Offsets Setting Work Offsets Now that we have a range of ways of measuring the position of a tool we can look at entering the information onto the Offsets screen X Ref X Direct Entry to Axis DRO Zero 1 0000 cee All the measurement methods give the current Y 1 4 O O 0 Ref Y position of the tool relative to the stock Zero assuming the face you have measured to is to Z 0 D 4 0 RefZ be zero in the program coordinates all you Zero need to do is to type the value into the relevant A Ref A axis DRO You can do this on any screen O 00 O 0 l E Comection radius Machine Coords Ret xvz For example after using the adjustable parallels 0 0009 and with
100. ad If you are writing your own G code the rapid retraction is best done by a G01 move with a large feedrate say F99999 as this ensures that the control software Constant Velocity is used to make the fastest and smoothest reversal CV would not be used if GOO is employed During the start of the rapid retraction the tap is still actually moving into the hole then stationary This should be allowed for when F a O Figure 8 27 Measuring spindle speed Using Tormach PCNC 1100 8 14 30625 Rev C3 1 Machine upgrades and configuration calculating distances For best results especially with long threads you should check that the actual spindle speed corresponds to that commanded by the S word by using a tachometer e g Tormach p n 30527 figure 8 27 30635 Rev C3 1 8 15 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 9 Appendices Warranty Specifications and Maintenance 9 1 9 2 9 3 Intended Use Statement The PCNC 1100 is intended for use as a general purpose CNC milling machine The intended use includes cutting conventional non abrasive materials such as unhardened steel aluminum plastics wood and similar materials The PCNC 1100 is intended to be used with the software configuration files provided by Tormach Support Tormach provides free technical support through multiple channels The methods are listed below in order of preference The quickest way to get the answers you need is normally checking in order of
101. ae aa aia ees 3 5 4 Routes from an Idea to a Part oooccoonnncconnniccnncnonanononanenonnnenonnnenannnnnos 4 1 4 1 Controlling the PCN Ci caen a 4 1 4 2 Choosing the Appropriate Design Software sccccsssscsssccsssscssssccssssccssssccssscsssscosees 4 2 4 3 Soltware tor CADE AM iman cisne r ve cia iio daa deseado ande oa 4 2 A A A a 4 3 A on 4 3 E CAN o o A ceetoduaatensuamisasatiams 4 4 43A R nnine the G Cod seee e a E E E oa sod E a denls E AAEE EE E ER 4 6 ASS CADCAM SENS ii DA A A N 4 6 4 4 Programming with Wizards cc caccccececcceecctcessccteucees lt ceecatesssvaseusitecetecceuceececscosencchaseteaaiateeusss 4 9 FAL Machinme Wizard Cone ptys s5 isoviacoisasnddakulascentenncddodutanechasaeddabsiacutehquaedbaddbacsmabsatas ibid 4 9 AATE Sclectine and Je Unni a Wizarda isd ANE 4 9 Al Standard Wizard Petit Sicario 4 9 AlS Gecode romo Wiz cida E 4 10 AANA Commercial WIZards iio 4 10 5 Machine CONTO Sisa ida 5 1 5 1 MEA soreo ness anaa a a aaa 5 1 Slt OPEO S Panel ara a rE A A re on 5 1 A AA O E 5 3 lo ROOMS ALO incitan 5 3 MZ MAN 1 R OO IS ur dois 5 3 A Bra sects adc E cosines aoeeasnonseanass 5 4 Dales PMI Speed KAM GCS cite 5 5 5 2 Screen Control Panda sia E a a e E E 5 5 JAL VST OSES SC RCCM Sioa ccs sae eyes sas 5 5 5 2 2 Families of Related Controls na a keane kaw e 5 5 3221 Sereen Switching Controls il 5 5 32 22 AXIS Control Famil iia 5 6 52 23 Jossins Control Family a 5 7 3224 Pnad Speed C
102. aller the diameter of the object onto which the rule is placed so the setup is done on the mandrel not on the gear blank itself toh y eS x LA TA 3 Pene p aa a N 2 Figure 8 5 Ruler vertical so on center Figure 8 6 Ruler tilted to left at top so cutter is too high If the gear cutter 1s mounted so that it can be inserted at the same height each time e g on an R8 holder then it may be worthwhile to set up and save a work offset giving the centerline as Y 0 0 and Z 0 0 so that the setup does not need to be repeated each time the machine is switched on Digitizer Probes Introduction to Uses of Probes and Tool Setters If you mount a switch in the spindle instead of a cutting tool and connect the switch to the control computer so that the software can read it then you can use the machine for measuring instead of cutting The switch is usually arranged so it operates when a probe tip is moved horizontally in any direction or pushed up Figure 8 7 shows a probe from the Tormach range of accessories p n 30668 probing the top of a partially machined part The Tormach probe has a standard TTS 34 shank and is best used in the 34 R8 collet p n 30146 Note We advise you to mark the spindle pulley with a dot of paint and always to insert the probe with the spindle in the same position This eliminates any errors caused by random positioning Keep the spindle lock ON when the probe is in This will prevent
103. ally the length of the cutting tool in use so that the controlled point is at the end of the cutting tool 7 1 6 Coordinated Linear Motion To drive a tool along a specified path a machining system must often coordinate the motion of several axes We use the term coordinated linear motion to describe the situation in which nominally each axis moves at constant speed and all axes move from their starting positions to their end positions at the same time If only the X Y and Z axes or any one or two of them move this produces motion in a straight line hence the word linear in the term In actual motions it 1s often not possible to maintain constant speed because acceleration or deceleration is required at the beginning and or end of the motion It is feasible however to control the axes so that at all times each axis has completed the same fraction of its required motion as the other axes This moves the tool along the same path and we also call this kind of motion coordinated linear motion Coordinated linear motion can be performed either at the prevailing feed rate or at rapid traverse rate If physical limits on axis speed make the desired rate unobtainable all axes are slowed to maintain the desired path 7 1 7 Feed Rate The rate at which the controlled point or the axes move is nominally a steady rate which may be set by the user In the Interpreter the interpretation of the feed rate is as follows unless inverse t
104. am stop a O MEROS e E Flood coolant on a Call subroutine Figure 7 4 Built in M codes Note 1 These codes are built in but application specific to the PCNC 1100 7 8 2 Spindle Control M3 M4 and M5 To start the spindle turning clockwise at the currently programmed speed program M3 To start the spindle turning counterclockwise at the currently programmed speed program M4 For a PWM or Step Dir spindle the speed is programmed by the S word For an on off spindle control it will be set by the gearing pulleys on the machine To stop the spindle from turning program M5 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 7 28 30625 Rev C3 1 7 8 3 7 8 4 7 8 5 7 8 6 7 8 7 Programming language reference It is OK to use M3 or M4 if the spindle speed is set to zero if this is done or if the speed override switch is enabled and set to zero the spindle will not start turning If later the spindle speed is set above zero or the override switch is turned up the spindle will start turning It is permitted to use M3 or M4 when the spindle is already turning or to use M5 when the spindle is already stopped but see the discussion on safety interlocks in configuration for the implications of a sequence that would reverse an already running spindle Tool change M6 Provided tool change requests are not to be ignored as defined in Configure gt Logic The CS will call a macro q v M6Start when the com
105. and by the Control Software when it is implementing cutter radius compensation with G42 and G43 Generally this function is implemented within CAD CAM software so the diameter information in the table is merely a reminder of the nature of the tool you should have loaded Remember that we did not mind where we measured the lengths of each tool from It could be the spindle nose but it could be any point provided it is the same for each tool The techniques below use an imaginary measuring point that makes the Master Tool have zero length You may find that you need to follow one of the setting procedures below to fully understand the theory Choose the one that best matches the tooling you have 6 4 3 Master Tool and Numbering Tools You should choose one tool from you library to be the Master Tool Ideally it should be a tool that you are very unlikely to ever take out of its tool holder Try to avoid a tool that you are likely to break or will suffer a lot of wear A four flute end mill is easier to gauge from that a two flute end cutting mill If you have plenty of tool holders then it is ideal to use a non cutting tool like the finder shown in figure 6 11 as master tool If you choose your master tool as the longest of any tool you are likely to use and measure the tools in such a way that its length seems to be 0 0 then you will be protected from a risk of crashing a tool into the work if you inadvertently turn tool length offsets off This
106. and stopping machining The pendants can be plugged into any spare USB port One on the keyboard is often convenient Windows will recognize it and install any driver software automatically Jog Shuttle Controller The Jog Shuttle Controller is a low cost but very precise and fast way of jogging the four axes There are five buttons and two rotary controls figure 5 30 Figure 5 30 Jog Wheel pendant Using Tormach PCNC 1100 5 16 30625 Rev C3 1 Machine controls The buttons allow you to select which axis you wish to jog The chosen axis is indicated by a LED next to the corresponding DRO For example figure 5 31 shows that the X axis is the one to be jogged If a Jog Shuttle Controller is not installed then all the LEDs will be dark The Step button will cycle through a set of jog step sizes lose MIESG15 G80 G28 in the Step DRO in the Jogging family H The outer rotary shuttle control is spring loaded Turning X O E OC it will jog the selected axis at a speed proportional to the a amount it is turned There are seven different speeds Y z O OC arranged geometrically so you have instant control from Zero Tien the full rapid speed 65 rpm down to the slowest crawl 7m LA mr The inner rotary control operated by fingertip has Figure 5 31 X axis will be jogged detents Each click will jog at the current feed rate by the distance defined in the Step DRO If you turn it faster
107. any available industry standard tools The CAD CAM system Turbo CADCAM 3 used for se ic examples in this manual is one such os tool that is very powerful but l a reasonably priced HE The original drawing is shown in figure amp N a 3 4 It consists of the characters 1 3 PCNC and an irregular quadrilateral a Y C Deta Having drawn the outline of the part R 3 we defined the material from which it Ne a will be cut the size of tool to cut the E A letters 14 the depth of the letters the size of tool to cut the recess 2 and the depth of the recess The recs JN ja a N Oli program automatically creates the part Figure 3 4 The drawing for FirstPart program G and M codes to make the s Using Tormach PCNC 1100 3 2 30625 Rev C3 1 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 Making your first part part and can display a visualization of the finished work figure 3 5 We will discuss the options which you have for designing your own parts in the next chapter al You should now be able to relate f the toolpath display to the part illustrated Running the Demonstration Part c program i F Q Part Material A p We suggest that you use a free cutting material to make this first part MDE birch ply or as we Figure 3 5 CAD CAM Visualization of finished part used resin impregnated ply are all suitable You need a piece at least 2 thick and 7 by 4 Clamp this securely to the P
108. ar motion dencia 7 2 Copyriedtstate mdd 1 4 Current position L ai E E E E 7 3 Cutter compensation material edge Contour did das 6 13 tool diameter entry move A A a ee eT 6 15 TUS MINOW C area Sort A 6 15 EME MOVE decis 6 16 tool path CONtOUT ooccccoccncnocnnonccncnonnnononnnnnos 6 14 Cutter diameter compensation through CAD CAM coccconoccccnncnnnonnnnnnnononinnnnnos 6 12 through control SO tWare ooocccooccccoccnono 6 12 Cutter radius compensation G40 G41 G42 defined oooccccccnocccnnccnnoononns 7 19 Cycle Start button seee eenen enea 5 10 D Demonstration program A eeu Ene On re eevee Sere rant 3 2 Diameter compensation LED described AA a II 5 7 DAI POD e 8 3 30635 Rev C3 1 29 Digitizer probe interface oooncccoccncnncnnnnonnnnnnoss 8 12 Direction of JOS SING ii 2 16 Disclaimer of liability o ooocccooccnnnccnnnnccnnos 1 4 Display mode button oocccooccccoccnconcnnnnonnnononos 5 12 Diver test program iran ic 2 10 Drilling canned cycle Ee AE E an E E E See 7 23 Drilling with dwell canned cycle E e E ANR A E AE EOR E A E 7 24 O en Cee O me wee EN melee 7 3 EN A wis lentsGldaeudentuniubeatie 7 15 E Electrical Overview diagram ccceccccseseceeeeeeeeees 7 Electrical specifications cooocccooccncnocnnononnnononnnns 9 2 ESOP DUON uste lll a 2 13 on control panel untada lid di 5 2 Exact stop mode G61 A measweeoac me uaceemeces 7 21 purpose of explalned
109. atch Right 30714 Machine Stand Stand Door latch Center 30571 3 30712 30718 30714 AM E S i E E E E E I oo O Appendices 10 3 Appendix 3 Optimization of Windows XP The PC running your mill does not simply send G amp M codes down to the mill rather it is intimately involved with control of the axis motors and spindle It reviews and updates electrical signals to every axis motor 25 000 times each second If your PC is busy thinking about other things there can be problems in motion control We advise you not to cut a part with the control computer connected to a network The steps listed below will optimize Windows XP There are a large number of esoteric Windows functions which if enabled can cause problems You will know if you have difficulties if machine motion sounds rough or if a long move makes a periodic ticking sound In difficult cases please consult Tormach for more detail changes that could be made 10 3 1 Remove Unnecessary Services and Startup Programs Background There are a variety of programs that can run in the background stealing CPU power These programs may watch your keystrokes track communications or try to seek out networks New computers are often laden with freebee versions of programs that are loaded when the computer starts Things to remove include QuickTime RealPlayer AOL messenger QuickBooks Instant Messenger camera video software music so
110. ating envelope of the machine Another reason to use a full motion tray is to reserve the space that will be required when the machine moves If you use a narrow drip tray or none at all you should plan for full machine motion plus some human space when you place the machine in your workshop You do not want to locate it where you can create crush points between the machine table and a wall When in operation the X Y and Z motions will not stop when they hit something The machine will move with hundreds of pounds of force enough to punch through a wall tip over the machine or crush someone in the way Machine safety is the responsibility of the operator This includes all aspects of safety setup location operation security and all other factors that involve safety The PCNC 1100 requires a minimum plan area of 67 wide by 43 deep This gives clearance for the full motion of the table and for minimal access for cabling etc The overall height required is 82 assuming that it is installed with the table at a working height of 36 Tormach offers a range of stands both ready made and designs for you to have constructed locally You should choose a well lit location and provide any additional task lighting to make it easy to setup work on the table Over time you will find that you accumulate a range of tools and tool holders so you should allocate space for storage of these near the machine A rack with numbered slots is convenient
111. awing the toolpath is a lower priority It will draw Og OU ON points on the toolpath display whenever it has A 0 0000 9 7262 spare time and it joins these points by straight Y 2 3921 0 0000 lines So if time is short only a few points will Z 0 5000 1 0000 be drawn and circles will tend to appear as A 0 0000 0 0000 polygons where the straight sides are very Absolute Motion Extremes noticeable This 1s nothing to worry about The Simulate Program Run button will execute simulate Program Run the G code but without any tool movement and Estimated Program Run TimeQQ 00 0 allow the time to make the part to be estimated The Absolute Motion Extremes data allow you Figure 5 16 Toolpath and G code display to check 1f the maximum excursion of the family 30635 Rev C3 1 5 11 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 5 2 2 8 Machine Controls controlled point is reasonable e g not milling the top of the table The toolpath display can be rotated by left clicking and dragging the mouse in it It can be zoomed by shift left clicking and dragging and can be panned by dragging a right click The Regenerate button will regenerate the toolpath display from the G code with the currently enabled fixture and G92 offsets The Display Mode button will chose whether the default toolpath display is sized for the machine envelope as defined by the soft limits or the object defined by the extremis of the part program The Jog Follow button al
112. backlash ballscrews and laser aligned in the factory so is inherently very accurate The home switches will operate at the same point with a repeatability of much better than 0 001 You do however need to consider the following points e You are measuring at one point on the stock If its surface in not flat or it 1s not clamped exactly parallel to the table then the height at other places will be different e Achange of 40 F in the temperature of a ballscrew say between early morning in the winter and when the shop and machine has heated up in the afternoon will amount to a difference of around 0 004 when the tool is near the table at the bottom of the Z axis General Accuracy Issues The minimum discrete position move is 0 0001 this is the resolution of motion Machine accuracy is closely related to ballscrew accuracy Our ballscrews are accurate to 0 0006 per foot but considering all the other factors that come into play we prefer to keep accuracy expectations to 0 0013 per foot Repeatability will be better than 0 001 per foot Machining is a mix of science skill and art The caveat in stating accuracy and repeatability is that these factors depend on the techniques used by the machinist A skilled machinist can often deliver accuracy that exceeds the accuracy specified by the machine builder while an inexperienced machinist may have difficulty delivering the expected accuracy With this understanding we cannot tell you what accur
113. best package you can afford Alibre produces a good example of a mid range 3D CAD package and Alibre Design XPress is bundled with the PCNC 1100 Alibre allows you to design parts by extruding 2D shapes The extrusions can be from different planes or surfaces of the part as it is built up and can be solid material or holes Several parts can be put together into an assembly and conventional orthographic engineering drawings more or less automatically produced from the model High end programs like Solidworks and Pro ENGINEER also work in the same way and can be used to design for manufacture with the PCNC 1100 A 3D CAD program will typically allow the export of solid models IGES or STL format for input to a 3D CAM program or DXF Figure 4 2 Keyhole format files for use in 2 2D CAM 4 3 2 2D CAD In a 2D CAD program you represent parts by drawing the individual views of the engineering drawings A vast range of software is available much of it free We advise that you use software that allows you to express the intent of your design in the drawings rather than just drawing a set of lines As an example let us assume you want to l l Figure 4 4 Joined make a key hole shaped slot in a block of Figure 4 3 Line moved points material This can easily be drawn as two RARE mes arcs and two lines with the hole that accepts the key s shank being highlighted figure 4 2 How useful this drawing is depends of
114. c Motion Any pair of the linear axes XY YZ and XZ can be controlled to move in a circular arc in the plane of that pair of axes While this is occurring the third linear axis and the rotational axes can be controlled to move simultaneously at effectively a constant rate As in coordinated linear motion the motions can be coordinated so that acceleration and deceleration do not affect the path If the rotational axes do not move but the third linear axis does move the trajectory of the controlled point is a helix Using Tormach PCNC 1100 7 2 30625 Rev C3 1 Programming language reference The feed rate during arc motion is as described in Feed Rate above In the case of helical motion the rate is applied along the helix Beware as other interpretations are used on other systems 7 1 9 Coolant Flood coolant and mist coolant may each be turned on independently They are turned off together 7 1 10 Dwell A machining system may be commanded to dwell 1 e keep all axes unmoving for a specific amount of time The most common use of dwell is to break and clear chips or for a spindle to get up to speed The units in which you specify Dwell are either seconds or Milliseconds depending on the setting on Configure gt Logic 7 1 11 Units Units used for distances along the X Y and Z axes may be measured in millimeters or inches Units for all other quantities involved in machine control cannot be changed Different quantities use di
115. c is specified using either G02 clockwise arc or G03 counterclockwise arc The axis of the circle or helix must be parallel to the X Y or Z axis of the machine coordinate system The axis or equivalently the plane perpendicular to the axis is selected with G17 Z axis XY plane G18 Y axis XZ plane or G19 X axis YZ plane If the arc is circular it lies in a plane parallel to the selected plane If a line of code makes an arc and includes rotational axis motion the rotational axes turn at a constant rate so that the rotational motion starts and finishes when the X YZ motion starts and finishes Lines of this sort are hardly ever programmed If cutter radius compensation is active the motion will differ from the above see Cutter Compensation Two formats are allowed for specifying an arc We will call these the center format and the radius format In both formats the G02 or GO3 is optional if it is the current motion mode Radius Format Arc In the radius format the coordinates of the end point of the arc in the selected plane are specified along with the radius of the arc Program G02 X Y Z A R or use G03 instead of GO2 R is the radius The axis words are all optional except that at least one of the two words for the axes in the selected plane must be used The R number is the radius A positive radius indicates that the arc turns through 180 degrees or less while a negative radius indicates a turn of 180 degrees to 3
116. cal kind Mouse balls and workshop conditions do not mix well Optimizing the Windows Installation It is important that the computer used to control your PCNC does not have a large load of software running in the background Examples are the automatic update utilities for Windows and virus spam checkers Multimedia software and telephony and messaging software Such software can wake up at any time and place large loads on the computer and its disk sub system This can sometimes interfere with timing of movement of PCNC and lead to spoiled work The simplest advice is e If you are using an existing computer that has been used for some time there are likely to be a number of unnecessary programs or drivers loaded when the computer boots Windows can be hard to clean up the best solution is often to re install Windows after formatting the hard drive You may prefer to ask an IT specialist to help you with this e Install the minimum options for Windows You should include access to the Internet so you can maintain your system software and access the Tormach web site but you will normally run with the network disabled e Do not install other software packages on the computer If you wish the control computer to be dual purpose then we advise you to create two partitions on the hard drive Install Windows in both but keep one as the minimal installation for the control software for the PCNC The other partition can contain what you like
117. cal axes and will show the part at the angle at which it will be cut Canned Cycle High Speed Peck Drill G73 The G73 cycle is intended for deep drilling or milling with chip breaking See also G83 The retracts in this cycle break the chip but do not totally retract the drill from the hole It is suitable for tools with long flutes which will clear the broken chips from the hole This cycle takes a Q number which represents a delta increment along the Z axis Program 30635 Rev C3 1 7 21 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 Programming language reference Gis ke Y e Ar Re LA Oe e Preliminary motion as described in G81 to 89 canned cycles e Move the Z axis only at the current feed rate downward by delta or to the Z position whichever is less deep e Rapid back out by the distance defined in the G73 Pullback DRO on the Settings screen e Rapid back down to the bottom of the current hole but backed off a bit e Repeat steps 1 2 and 3 until the Z position is reached at step 1 e Retract the Z axis at traverse rate to clear Z It is an error if the Q number is negative or zero 7 7 22 Cancel Modal Motion G80 Program G80 to ensure no axis motion will occur to terminate canned cycles etc Note that it cancels the current GO Gl G2 or G3 mode so this must be re established for the next move that is requited This particularly affects people adapting a CAM postprocessors from another machine as this behavior varies between differ
118. ccoocccnnocnnonccnnnos 7 13 G04 d Well ii inicias datar 7 15 G10 set coordinate systems oocccooccncnocnnonccnnnos 7 15 G12 citcular POCkel ici ii 7 16 GIS circular POCKel usina 7 16 G15 exit Polar Mod s 7 16 G16 enter Polar mode ooocccooccncnccncnocnnonccnnnns 7 16 G17 select XY DIAN rias arios 7 16 G18 select XZ plane ss ciei dion dnancaadiiudiinerancsaaerseas 7 16 G19 select YZ plane in ennie 7 16 620 meh units SCLIN E ennaii 7 17 G21 millimetre units setting eens 7 17 GZS ST CCUM CO NOME 7 17 12871 Ele CNCS Ax CS ar 7 17 GSO TEC LO MOMO sida 7 17 G31 and probe hardware options 06008 8 4 GS Star oht PROBS oae aa aa 7 17 G40 cutter radius compensation Off 7 19 G41 cutter radius compensation Left 7 19 G42 cutter radius compensation Right 7 19 G43 enable tool length offset 7 19 G44 enable tool length offset 7 19 G49 disable tool length offset 7 19 G50 clear axis scale factors ooocooooccnooccncooo 7 20 G51 set axis scale factors ooooccccoocnnoncnncnoo 7 20 E A een a 7 20 G53 move in absolute machine coordinates 7 20 G54 select fixture licita id 7 21 Gs cie CULOS Zorras e iee e aaa 7 21 G56 select XUE 3 erip e i e aaa 7 21 G57 select fixture 4 ocres ice 7 21 G58 select fixture AAA 7 21 G59 select an
119. cessors are both satisfactory e Video of 1024 x 768 Certain low cost computers with integrated video have shown problems In those situations the best solution is to disable the motherboard based video and install an inexpensive video card in an expansion slot e Most laptop computers are unsuitable and any which can be made to work will only do so by re installing Windows without the APCI Advanced Power Configuration Interface This will cripple the machine for normal portable use e You need a parallel printer port 25 pin D socket A USB to printer adaptor cannot be used in place of this If this port is on the motherboard then the standard configuration will use it PCI parallel ports from many manufacturers can however be used You will need to consult Chapter 9 for details of the configuration process for cards which do not use the standard port address of 0x378 e Some motherboards based on the Via chipset have proved incompatible with the control software If you are buying such a board please ensure your supplier will take it back and refund the cost in the unlikely event that you have problems 30635 Rev C3 1 2 7 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 2 7 2 Preparation e ACD ROM drive is essential for software installation e We advise you to use a USB storage device for transporting small files like G code programs to the machine tool These devices are variously known as flash thumb jump or key drives The mos
120. chnicians should perform such operations 1 1 2 General Operating Safety Safe operation of the machine depends on its proper use and the precautions taken by each operator Read and understand this manual Be certain every operator understands the operation and safety requirements of this machine before operating the machine 30635 Rev C3 1 1 1 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 Preface Always wear safety glasses and safety shoes Always stop the spindle and check to ensure the CNC control is in the stop mode before changing or adjusting the belt pulley position tool or work piece Never wear rings watches gloves long sleeves neckties jewelry or other loose items when operating or working around the machine Long hair should be bound or kept under a hat Use adequate safeguarding around the operating envelope It is the responsibility of the employer to provide and ensure point of operation safeguarding per OSHA 1910 212 Milling Machine 1 1 3 Safety Publications Tormach recommends the following publications for assistance in enhancing the safe use of this machine e Safety Requirements for The Construction Care and Use of Drilling Milling and Boring Machines ANSI B11 8 1983 Available from The American National Standards Institute 1430 Broadway New York New York 10018 e Concepts and Techniques of Machine Safeguarding OSHA Publication Number 3067 Available from The Publication Office O S H A U S Department of
121. citly programmed to be different The R number is always sticky In incremental distance mode when the X Y plane is selected X Y and R numbers are treated as increments to the current position and Z as an increment from the Z axis position before the move involving Z takes place when the YZ or XZ plane is selected treatment of the axis words is analogous In absolute distance mode the X Y R and Z numbers are absolute positions in the current coordinate system The L number is optional and represents the number of repeats L 0 is not allowed If the repeat feature is used it is normally used in incremental distance mode so that the same sequence of motions is repeated in several equally spaced places along a straight line In absolute distance mode L gt 1 means do the same cycle in the same place several times Omitting the L word is equivalent to specifying L 1 The L number is not sticky Using Tormach PCNC 1100 7 22 30625 Rev C3 1 Programming language reference When L gt 1 in incremental mode with the X Y plane selected the X and Y positions are determined by adding the given X and Y numbers either to the current X and Y positions on the first go around or to the X and Y positions at the end of the previous go around on the repetitions The R and Z positions do not change during the repeats The height of the retract move at the end of each repeat called clear Z in the descriptions below is determined by the set
122. ck a Materials Safety Data Sheet MSDS of suspect materials Refuse machining work requests of unknown materials 20 If you are in any doubt you must seek guidance from a professionally qualified expert rather than risk injury to yourself or to others 1 2 Personal CNC Concept The PCNC 1100 is a machine tool intended to make CNC machining more personal As with the evolution of personal computers the evolution of personal CNC alters the paradigm of what a machine tool is about We aim for a machine tool so affordable that anyone can have one We feel that the work of engineers inventors technicians hobbyists educators and others will be enhanced when they have access to CNC machinery In education each student can run his own machine instead of waiting in line when the machine tool costs less than 20 of a small machining center In R amp D turn around on prototype design takes minutes instead of days when a machine is at the ready and on site In general engineering designs sent to the production machine shop are improved when the design engineer has been more involved in the prototype creation The PCNC 1100 offers the precision of a production machine but with cost performance optimized for short run operation 13 Performance Expectations 1 3 1 Cutting Ability The machine is capable of cutting most materials at or near their recommended feeds and speeds For example for fast metal removal on 6061 aluminium we will run a
123. ckground can kill it and there will be other programs which you probably are not even aware are on your system that can do the same Windows can and does start many processes in the background some appear as icons in the systray and others do not show themselves in any way Other possible sources of erratic operation are local area network connections which may be configured to automatically speed detect You should configure these to the actual speed 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps of your network Because of these factors it is important that you test your system when you suspect something is Wrong or you just want to check that the install went well Navigate by Windows Explorer to the PCNC folder usually C PCNC3 Double click the file DriverTest or if you display file extensions DriverTest exe figure 2 12 You can ignore all the boxes with the exception of the Pulse Frequency It should be fairly steady around 24 600Hz but may vary even wildly on some systems This does not necessarily mean the pulse timer is unsteady it may mean that the computer is heavily loaded or slow to begin with since the Control Software takes the highest priority in the system the clock may be shunted down to a priority slow enough that its one second is a variable length of time Since the pulse count is based on one second of Windows time variations in Windows time will make the pulse count look like it is swinging around a lot even when it is rock solid Basically i
124. cnocnnoncononannnonccnnns 6 2 Frademar A O E EE 1 4 Transportation of machine coooccccoccnncnccnnnnnos 9 13 Troubleshooting CIC CUI A a e 9 13 mee harie alhainen ea ee 9 12 TTS WITH TOOL OSOS ad 6 7 TTS Tormach Tooling System coooccccoccnccnccnnos 5 3 TTS tooling inserting and removing ooocccoocnncncnnnnnnnnononnnnnonos 5 4 Typographics conventions in this manual U Unary operators discal 7 8 Un installation of driver TV AMAIA sr ci EE EE EEEE 2 11 Units inch degree ans millimetre oooccconccnco 7 3 Unpacking new machine ccoooccncoccnnoncnnoncnnnoncnnnns 2 4 Unusual modes when Control Software is running 5 14 W Windows Optimisation procedures ccccooccconccncnncnnoncnnnnnnoss 12 Wizard checking code output by ooccccooccccnccno 4 10 Wizards for conversational programming cccoooccccnco 4 9 Word BONEN Oea E EE 7 7 A tees ociteyeinsatencnsaeeheceaeddientseeiees 7 7 Work offsets by Touch DUTLONS cc ii 6 5 by typing into DRO oooccccnccnncnccnnnocnnonccnnnnnnss 6 5 setting X and Y by probe ooocccoccccccccncnncnnnns 6 6 USING more than ON coooccccoccnccnccncnncnnnnnnnnnoss 6 12 Ke ANG VS AAA 6 5 X XMLTweak setting non standard address ceseeeee 9 10 spindle speed calibrati0N oooccoooccconoccnos 9 8 Y Y axis drive assembling on new Machine oocccccoccnoncnnnn
125. cosssecssecsceoscecscessscesscecssesssessseo 1 4 NOMENCIA MILE a litio cicle 1 5 PISpPara OW ercis 2 1 Reams tor Your CNC acess enano tene E E E E E sete cteteus 2 1 rua ie Qe 01 1 68 01 Career tem O dren Cette ol ere ere eee 2 1 Loc on and MOU E otras aoa sacund ss aescasanbendigea sacnaunbessunee teacesoneee 2 1 Computer Mounn Ari OCC I esa EEEE E E 2 3 Can E e e eo E E 2 3 Receiving Unpacking and Checking Shipment ccssccsssscssssccssssccssscccsssccsscceseces 2 4 Mormone 2 1 eee ee ener he ee er eee eon een ee eee eT re te eer ere eee rarer Ter rarer 2 4 Uac me anad T po Oa E ner ree eee 2 4 PENTEL LO VLU ie Yaki DIINO oi a eee eee ener res 2 4 Mountine the PONC MAA A 2 5 ii a P EAN PAEA E PAA AA AE AA A A E 2 5 Ln rOn DEO sc AAE EAE EEEE EA EEE E 2 5 E a OME A DON ee EE A 2 5 E E AA A 2 6 PS SONS as esr A AAE A EAE EAEE AEEA EAE AE E EAE 2 6 Power tothe BOING orn S 2 6 Power for Machine ACCESSOFICS cssssicsicisusissiesuscuicosaensidei unaiona eie aaa taesediceeeeeces 2 7 Control Computer and Software Installation csscccsssscssssccssssccssscccsssccsssscsssscoes 2 7 Computer peca CA GION rta 2 7 Optimizing the Windows Installati0N ooocccooccnnoccnonononononnnononnnnnnnnononnnonnnnonncnnoncnnnnnos 2 8 Installing the Control SOM MATO sss saacseacsocasasssannsoasaentaeacseansonssaeannascaanborsteanodanteuasansaaanoasnbensen 2 9 AP eo EE O En A 2 9 VLR E DOO 00 OPOPNOQ U O 5 U OO PPP e o E EE
126. cro within the Control Software totally rewrite it and save it with a different file name Other Input Codes Feed Rate F To set the feed rate program F Depending on the setting of the Feed Mode toggle the rate may be in units per minute or units per rev of the spindle The units are those defined by the G20 G21 mode Depending on the setting in Configure gt Logic a revolution of the spindle may be defined as a pulse appearing on the Index input or be derived from the speed requested by the S word or Set Spindle speed DRO The feed rate may sometimes be overridden as described in M48 and M49 above Spindle Speed S To set the speed in revolutions per minute rpm of the spindle program S The spindle will turn at that speed when it has been programmed to start turning It is OK to program an S word whether the spindle is turning or not If the speed override switch is enabled and not set at 100 the speed will be different from what is programmed It is OK to program SO the spindle will not turn if that is done It is an error if The S number is negative Select Tool T To select a tool program T where the T number is slot number for the tool The tool is not changed automatically It is OK but not normally useful if T words appear on two or more lines with no tool change It is OK to program TO no tool will be selected This is useful if you want the spindle to be empty after a tool change It is an error i
127. ct 3 l Kins Suitable for touching c la a PEE TA Zero 1 Adjust probe from 2 and 3 __ step ts lt Work Offset gt 1 L G54 curved or inclined faces Click to set rotation of program axes Verbose Messages E El RESET C PCNC3 Temp tap Clear Initialization Macro Called on reset PCNC M3 R2 7 SRev 6 23 G Co des M Co des Simple Run Ctl Alt 1 Comp Run Alt 1 MDI Alt 2 Toolpath Alt 3 Offsets Alt 5 Settings Alt 6 Diagnostics Alt 7 XN Probe CtlLAhS Z Probe Alt 9 Figure 8 17 The two areas of Comp X Y Probe screen The probing and recording function is done using the yellow buttons and the DROs enclosed in the red box of the figure The offset setting is done with the DROs and green buttons enclosed in the blue box Probing to Set Point DROs Before probing you should set which Point will be used to record the probed coordinates by clicking Select 1 Select 2 or Select 3 The adjacent LED will indicate the currently selected point The circular central yellow button will set the Point to the centre of the circular hole in which the probe tip is placed Ensure that the Z axis is lowered sufficiently so contact is made on the equator of the tip The cross pattern of square buttons probes in the two X directions and the two Y directions Unlike on the simple X Y Probing screen the face being probed does not need to be square on to an axis and can be a circular arc segment This is indica
128. ctions respectively of the center of the circle I and J are optional except that at least one of the two must be used It is an error if e X and Y are both omitted e andJare both omitted When the XZ plane is selected program G02 X Y Z A I K or use GO3 instead of G02 The axis words are all optional except that at least one of X and Z must be used I and K are the offsets from the current location or coordinates depending on IJ mode X and Z directions respectively of the center of the circle I and K are optional except that at least one of the two must be used It is an error if e X and Z are both omitted e and K are both omitted When the YZ plane is selected program G02 X Y Z A J K or use G03 instead of G02 The axis words are all optional except that at least one of Y and Z must be used J and K are the offsets from the current location or coordinates depending on IJ mode Y and Z Using Tormach PCNC 1100 7 14 30625 Rev C3 1 Programming language reference directions respectively of the center of the circle J and K are optional except that at least one of the two must be used It is an error if e Y and Z are both omitted e J and K are both omitted Here is an example of a center format command to mill an arc in Incremental IJ mode Gi GUZ ALO VG POS IU eZ That means to make a clockwise as viewed from the positive Z axis circular or helical arc whose axis is parallel to the Z a
129. current point at the time of executing the G16 are the polar origin It is an error if all axis words are omitted If cutter radius compensation is active the motion will differ from the above see Cutter Compensation If G53 is programmed on the same line the motion will also differ see Absolute Coordinates Linear Motion at Feed Rate G01 a For linear motion at feed rate for cutting or not program G01 X Y Z A where all the axis words are optional except that at least one must be used The GO is optional if the current motion mode is G01 This will produce coordinated linear motion to the destination point at the current feed rate or slower if the machine will not go that fast b If G16 has been executed to set a polar origin then linear motion at feed rate to a point described by a radius and angle G00 X Y can be used X is the radius of the line from the G16 polar origin and Y is the angle in degrees measured with increasing values counterclockwise from the 3 o clock direction 1 e the conventional four quadrant conventions Coordinates of the current point at the time of executing the G16 are the polar origin It is an error if all axis words are omitted If cutter radius compensation is active the motion will differ from the above see Cutter Compensation If G53 is programmed on the same line the motion will also differ see Absolute Coordinates Arc at Feed Rate G02 and G03 A circular or helical ar
130. dds 7 17 La REEE ESO di ddd 7 17 ene Tad OG PROD ie A A hoe tccidna sat ecla sina aaa ann a aeaonalnen ana enonsoseseaenee 7 17 Ticks Tatent Probe COMMON ida 7 17 lA Usm tie stashi Probe Command anska ane a a 7 18 TZ Empe C de e EE EE 7 18 7 7 13 Cutter Radius Compensation G40 G41 and G42 cooccccoccnccnccnonccnnnnccnnnncnnoncnnnnnncnonccnnnnnons 7 19 7 714 Tool Length Offsets G43 G44 and G49 ccooocnccnnccnonocononcnnonononononnnnnconononnnonncnonncnnonnnnonoss 7 19 TIN Scale Factors G30 and Gril acces iria 7 20 7 7 16 Temporary Coordinate System Offset G52 o occooonncoconccncncnncnocnnoncnnonnconononnnonccnonncnnonacnnnnss 7 20 7 7 17 Move in Absolute Coordinates G53 ococoncnnnnccnnoncnnnncnnonocnnoncnnonnonononnnoncnnonnnnnonnnnonnnnnnnoons 7 20 7 7 18 Select Work Offset Coordinate System G54 to G59 amp G59 Pe oooonccconcccnnccnonocononccnnnnnons 7 21 7 719 Set Path Control Mode G61 and GOA ooooocccnnccncnccnncnccncnncnnoncnnononononncnnnncnnononnnnnnononncnnnnons 7 21 7 7 20 Coordinate system rotation G68 and GOO ooccoconnnonoccncnocnnoncnnonocononncnnnncnnonocnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnons 7 21 7 7 21 Canned Cycle High Speed Peck Drill G73 oocooonncnnccnncncnnonocnnoncnnnnocononccnnnnnononacnnnanons 7 21 7 7 22 Cancel Modal Motion G80 ooocccocccnnnccnonocononcnnnnocononcnnonononononnonnononnnnnnnrononnnnnnnncnonnnnnnnooss 7 22 TADS Canned Gy cles GS GO aa 7 22 7 7 23 1 Preliminary and In Between Mot
131. de the contour which begins at a point B and ends at A tangent to the contour and going in the same direction as it is planned to go around the contour The radius of the arc should be larger than half the diameter given in the tool table Then extend a line tangent to the arc from B to some point C located so that the line BC is more than one radius long After the construction is finished the code is written in the reverse order from the construction Cutter radius compensation is turned on after 30635 Rev C3 1 6 15 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 the alignment move and before the first entry move In the code o me rad pal C 1 5 above line NOO10 is the actual path alignment move line N0020 turns compensation on and makes the first entry move and line N0030 makes the second entry move lt Cutter In this example the arc AB and the line BC are fairly large but they need not be For a toolpath contour the radius of arc AB need only be slightly larger than the maximum possible deviation of the radius of the tool from the exact size Also for a toolpath contour the side chosen for compensation should be the one to use if the tool is oversized As mentioned earlier if the tool is undersized the interpreter will switch sides Simple Method Figure 6 26 The entry moves omitting first alignment move If the contour is a material edge contour and there is a convex corner somewhere on the contour a simpler method o
132. dimensions displayed Figure 4 7 Changed dimension changes drawing e g IGES file The main issues to consider are how many times you need to tell the CAM program how to machine the part and how good a visualization of the part you will be shown Suppose we decide that the inside of the keyhole slot is to be cut with a 0 125 end mill using 4434 50 Bla Part_1 y E Ti fem_0 25i y JOperatior 1 i A E Part_1 T3 fem_1m Operation 1 tf PocketMilling 6 GOO G17 G40 G49 G80 G30 TOOL COMMENT IS NOT FOUND M996 T3 M06 G00 G90 G54 X 0 0892 1 7348 56306 M03 G43 H3 21 MOS OPERATION NAME OPERATION 1 F31 5 MILLING POCKET GOO X 0 0892 Y 1 7348 20 1 v Apply IESE JA Autoapply PocketMilling 6 Time Oh 02m 40s RO 30 in See Figure 4 8 Path of tool and G code model MPaoeri a Using Tormach PCNC 1100 4 4 30625 Rev C3 1 From an idea to a part conventional milling to a depth of 0 5 with each pass being 0 1 deep The CAM software will generate a G code program for this In some freestanding CAM software if the size of the slot is changed so the drawing changes then you would have to create the pocket G code for the slot from scratch with each revision of the drawing Integrated CAD CAM software will work dynamically with the CAD and automatically recreate the new G code with each change in dimension A reasonably sop
133. dinates You do not however generally have to bother about machine coordinates They are displayed in case you want a cross check of how the offsets are adding up Program coord Work Offset G54 G52 G92 Offset T Current Tool C2 gt Machine coord Do not update by typing new value Offset On Off E X 0 0000 into offset DRO if Gh2 G92 is in use _Ref X x X coord 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Tool Diameter a O oreo Zero Touch 0 37 mC 2547 Y coord 0 01 5 Sa 0 000 0 0001 applied with G41 42 Touch Z coord 10 a 0 0000 3 200 Touch Length Touch Ref Z Acoord 0 0000 ES O T 0 0000 A 0 0000 _Zero Touch Goto Tool Change Home key Ref XYZ Ref A Figure 6 18 Z axis not moved but tool 2 selected Using Tormach PCNC 1100 6 8 30625 Rev C3 1 Offsets Next we put tool 2 in the spindle and enter 2 in the T DRO Now the tool will not be touching the stock it is after all 1 9 shorter than tool 1 Figure 6 18 shows that the Z program coordinate is as expected 1 9 Executing GOO Z0 0 will move the Z axis 1 9 down and of course put tool 2 in contact with the surface of the stock Finally it should be clear that jogging the Z axis up so that there is room to put tool 3 in the spindle selecting it in the T DRO and executing GOO Z0 0 again will put tool 3 in contact with the top of the stock The Tool Diameter is only used for the probe diameter for tool 99
134. dle controls manual coolant control and PC power control Digitizing amp tool touch off port optically isolated 30635 Rev C3 1 9 3 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 9 4 3 9 4 4 9 5 9 5 1 9 5 2 Appendices e Coolant or accessory AC outlet The AC outlet for coolant is automatically controlled via M codes while the operator console offers a convenient manual override e PC or accessory AC outlets manually controlled on the operator console e Power requirements 230 VAC single phase 110 VAC option System e Complete RS 274 G amp M codes implementation with unlimited program size Conventional G amp M code operations are complemented with manual mode operations operation wizards DXF drawing support HPGL bitmap and JPEG toolpath generation Operation Wizards allow pocketing surfacing cutouts drill patterns and other standard operations to be completed without the need for addition software or manual code writing e Supported codes include GOO Default Positioning Rapid Traverse GO1 Linear Interpolation G02 Circular Helical Interpolation CW G03 Circular Helical Interpolation CCW G04 Dwell G17 Default Circular Move XY Plane G18 Circular Move ZX Plane G19 Circular Move YZ Plane G20 Default 06 Inch Input G21 Millimeter Input G40 Default Cancel Cutter Compensation G41 Cutter Compensation Left G42 Cutter Compensation Right G53 Work Offset Cancel G54 G59 Work Offset G74 Incremental Input I J K
135. dle nose to table 17 Forward opening electrical cabinet This unique design allows service even when the machine is placed near to a wall Weight net shipping 1130 1325 lbs Rapid traverse X Y Z 65 IPM NEMA 34 stepper motors on X Y and Z Single Shot Lube Pump 13 point lubrication Each axis has an oil distribution channel milled full length on left and right vertical and horizontal surfaces all 4 sliding surfaces plus an oil line plumbed directly to the ball nut assembly Precision ground ball screws in the X Y and Z motion ISO DIN P4 grade Complete way covers Slide ways are a bonded low friction surface PTFE filled acetyl hand scraped slide ways with milled distribution slots 6 month warranty There is no on site factory service personnel Warranty service will involve replacement of components with direction from Tormach support staff 9 4 2 Electrical Spindle safety is enhanced with a tool change safety interlock and key switch lockout Main spindle contactor VFD power is automatically disengaged when operator is changing a tool Spindle M codes or manual spindle start will reengage VFD power automatically after tool change is completed Operator console has manual override for all spindle controls PC Windows Control with integrated safety amp manual overrides PC not included Windows XP is required Computer control is integrated with an operator control panel for spindle lockout manual spin
136. does everything needed to set the required offsets This imposes the limitation that the moves are performed by the software rather than by the operator For example while you can find the center of a circular bore you cannot find the center of a circular protruding boss even Figure 8 16 Accessing the Comp though the basic geometry is identical A Comprehensive ORI SCIEN Probing screen is provided to overcome this limitation The screen is accessed by a button on the simple X Y probing screen figure 8 16 For detailed manual control of probing go to Comp Probing Alt Figure 8 17 shows the Comp X Y Probing screen Using Tormach PCNC 1100 8 8 30625 Rev C3 1 Machine upgrades and configuration It gives the operator the required flexibility by separating the actions of probing for feature on the work and setting work offsets from the features The interface between the operations is the X Y coordinates of three points which are stored and displayed in a bank of DROs Fumach3 CNC Controller File Config View Wizards Operator Help Mil gt G15 G80 G17 G40 G20 G90 G94 G54 G49 G99 G64 G97 xX 0 0000 F __6 00 Y 0 0000 Cey Z 0 0000 a Test probe eg Mode Hum before move en Step Set point by moving Probed points Click to set work offset 1 2 3 so point is origin ta x 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 00 Y _ 0 0000 _ 0 0000 0 0000 Prat A z Select 1 m Select 2 Sele
137. e Jere 4 Floppy disk controllers O A A 037F H Floppy disk drives ange F H H E Human Interface Devices 00 1 0 Range 07S 077B H E IDE ATAJATAPI controllers MDMA 03 a9 IEEE 1394 Bus host controllers 59 Keyboards lt Mach x Pulsing Engines y Mice and other pointing devices a Monitors 8 Network adapters NVIDIA Network Bus Enumerator oy Ports COM amp LPT H E setting based or Current configuration Dg Chane IV Use automatic settings DR Conflicting device list i F Comos SS Port COMI No conflicts i F ECP Printer Port LPT1 B H Processor gt SCSI and RAID controllers v gt a 6 Sound video and aame controller profiles provide a way for you to set up and store Figure 9 14 IO address in Resources Adjust PCNC Profile Open Profile JCSPCNCENPCNC M3 xm CAUTION Do not run this utility when machine Control Software i nning or vou will lose your changes when you close the Control Software Printer Fart Printer port address in He does not need Os in number Help Spindle Calibration Spindle steps per unit are 1000 0 will be 999 929 5 4 56 Volts on Manual knob at full speed Measure voltages with Spindle Isolator in OFF position Help Save Profile Done Figure 9 15 Entering port address Volts on Auto Hi pulley 5 4200 MLTweak Rey 1 14 9 Finally run the XML
138. e If you forget and just click on another DRO then any value you have just entered will be Spindle CW ES discarded This is designed to avoid accidental changes ee T 1 Now check that the machine is safe and that the motor door is Rougher closed and click on the Spindle CW F5 button The spindle 7 nff 1 0000 will start running Clicking the button again will stop it Figure 2 18 Setting S word Using Tormach PCNC 1100 2 14 30625 Rev C3 1 2 8 4 2 8 5 Preparation The F5 in the caption tells you that function key F5 is a shortcut to this button it can also be used to start and stop the spindle Notice that there are two sets of screen LEDs The outer set indicates that the machine is dwelling to ensure the spindle has started and fully stopped The center LED indicates that it is running If you have connected a coolant pump to the outlet under the control box see vacant outlet in figure 2 10 then you will be able to control it by the Coolant Ctrl C button or its shortcut which is the Ctrl C key Beware of the position of the coolant nozzle before you try this MDI for Entering G and M code Commands When you are making parts the commands othe A 40 M5 machine G and Regenerate Toolpath Jog Follow Y Display Mo M codes will generally be read from a file It is however often convenient to command the PCNC directly This can be done by typing command into the Manual Data Input or MDI for
139. e 8 2 Scale and Radius Correction the engraving in linear units e g inches but now it is edited to use degrees the A axis needs scaling If the radius of the cylinder is R mm or inches depending on what the control program is set in then the A axis scale should be set to 57 3 R 1 e 360 2 T x R For example the radius of the disk in figure 8 1 is 1 21 so the scale for A was set to 47 36 by typing this value into the A Scale DRO on the MDI screen figure 8 2 Setting the Radius Correction So that the part program s engraving feed rate is correct the Radius correction DRO which is on Settings and also the MDI screen should also be set figure 8 2 Figure 8 3 Gear cutting Figure 8 4 Gear cutting tailstock removed for clarity Gear Cutting Figures 8 3 and 8 4 show the fourth axis set up for cutting a spur gear The G code for this is easily produced by hand or by a Wizard as it consists of a series of passes cutting a tooth followed by indexing by an angle say A corresponding to the number of teeth N A 360 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 8 2 30625 Rev C3 1 8 2 8 2 1 Machine upgrades and configuration It is important that the gear cutter is exactly on the centerline of the gear and its mandrel A steel rule can be used to set this quite accurately figures 8 5 amp 8 6 The rule can be seen against the body of the chuck above the mandrel Notice that the test is more sensitive the sm
140. e ball has a diameter on 0 375 so with 0 002 foil the correction is numerically 0 1895 The same technique can obviously be used on the edges of a piece of stock clamped to the table Note You need to be careful about whether the correction is plus or minus Figure 6 12 Measuring vise jaw Y position In the case of the vise jaw it is negative the center of the tool is actually nearer to 0 0 that the touching point For the outside of a workpiece it should be positive Thus in the example illustrated the value typed into the Touch Correction DRO will be 0 1865 figure 6 13 Goto Tool Laser Centering Techniques Touch If d to setup the X and Y i 5 you need to setup the X and Y program Correction O A 1 86 coordinates to features marked on or already machined in the workpiece then a A pe laser finder or centering microscope 1s very useful Figure 6 13 Inside corrections are negative Figure 6 14 shows a laser finder located near a center punch mark on the stock The point of light can be more clearly seen in the close up view figure 6 15 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 6 6 30625 Rev C3 1 Offsets Viewing the feature through a centering microscope has the same effect although the height of the Z axis is then much more important as it affects the focusing of the microscope Obviously no correction is needed for the position as the beam is where the center of the tool will be 6 4 Tool Offset
141. e by half a turn and re lock it The cable will now be to the left figure 8 20 e Select Point 3 Again use the round yellow button to find the center of the alignment bore If Probed points the probe was perfectly set 1 2 3 points 2 and 3 would be x 1 9320 coincident They probably will not be so you need to know how t do to adjust the screws _ Selecta E Select2 selecta e Rotate the probe back to the Zero 1 e Cable Right position t e Click the Adjust Probe from 2 lt Work Offset F 1 and 3 button The message line G54 will display the movement SNC3 Temp tap required on the three screws to centralize the probe tip The screw opposite the connector Figure 8 21 Controls for probe alignment and cable is Screw 1 and the others number clockwise looking from the top So Screw 2 is facing the control cabinet and Screw 3 1s visible on the southeast side of the probe The numbers are included on the probing photographs above for additional clarity A positive number is tightening the 30635 Rev C3 1 8 11 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 Machine upgrades and configuration screw and a negative number loosening it The value is millimeters which equates to turns on the Tormach probe You must loosen the screw s first the tighten the other s e You will not be able to estimate say 0 11 turns so get as near as you can and repeat the procedure getting nearer and nearer to the ideal point where all screw
142. e contour is a toolpath contour the path is described in the part program It is expected that except for during the entry moves the path is intended to create some part geometry The path may be generated manually or by a CAD CAM program considering the part geometry which is intended to be made For the Control Software to work the toolpath must be such that the tool stays in contact with the edge of the part geometry as shown on S path of tool tip destination pater ot oiin the left side of figure b Second construct this line to 6 23 Ifa path of the sort determine the destination point shown on the right of figure 6 23 18 used in First construct this line programmee poim which the tool does not stay in contact with the part geometry all the i Figure 6 24 First cutter compensation move Straight time the interpreter will not be able to compensate properly when undersized tools are used For a toolpath contour the value for the cutter diameter in the tool table will be a small positive number if the selected tool is slightly oversized and will be a small negative number if the tool is slightly undersized As implemented if a cutter diameter value is negative the interpreter compensates on the other side of the contour from the one programmed and uses the absolute value of the given diameter If the actual tool is the correct size the value in the table should be Zero Toolpath Contour Example Suppose the diamete
143. e controlled point should move at a certain number of inches per spindle revolution millimeters per spindle revolution or degrees per spindle revolution depending upon what length units are being used and which axis or axes are moving When the inverse time feed rate mode is active an F word must appear on every line which has a G1 G2 or G3 motion and an F word on a line that does not have G1 G2 or G3 is ignored Being in inverse time feed rate mode does not affect GO rapid traverse motions It is an error if inverse time feed rate mode is active and a line with G1 G2 or G3 explicitly or implicitly does not have an F word Canned Cycle Return Level G98 and G99 When the spindle retracts during canned cycles there is a choice of how far it retracts 1 Retract perpendicular to the selected plane to the position indicated by the R word 2 Retract perpendicular to the selected plane to the position that axis was in just before the canned cycle started unless that position is lower than the position indicated by the R word in which case use the R word position To use option 1 program G99 To use option 2 program G98 Remember that the R word has different meanings in absolute distance mode and incremental distance mode Built in M codes M codes interpreted directly by the CS are shown in figure 7 5 Program Stopping and Ending MO M1 M2 and M30 To stop a running program temporarily regardless of the setting of the
144. e is interpreted God Gol GIS Xe Yo 2026 Rico L3 This calls for incremental distance mode G91 old Z retract mode and calls for the G81 drilling cycle to be repeated three times The X number is 4 the Y number is 5 the Z number is 0 6 and the R number is 1 8 The initial X position is 5 1 4 the initial Y position is 7 2 5 the clear Z position is 4 8 1 8 3 and the Z position is 4 2 4 8 0 6 Old Z is 3 0 The first move is a traverse along the Z axis to 1 2 4 8 since old Z lt clear Z The first repeat consists of 3 moves e a traverse parallel to the X Y plane to 5 7 4 8 e a feed parallel to the Z axis to 5 7 4 2 e a traverse parallel to the Z axis to 5 7 4 8 The second repeat consists of 3 moves The X position is reset to 9 5 4 and the Y position to 12 7 45 e a traverse parallel to the X Y plane to 9 12 4 8 e a feed parallel to the Z axis to 9 12 4 2 e a traverse parallel to the Z axis to 9 12 4 8 The third repeat consists of 3 moves The X position is reset to 13 9 4 and the Y position to 17 12 5 e a traverse parallel to the X Y plane to 13 17 4 8 e a feed parallel to the Z axis to 13 17 4 2 e a traverse parallel to the Z axis to 13 17 4 8 G82 Cycle The G82 cycle is intended for drilling Program G32 Xe Ye 4 Ae RA Lea Ph e Preliminary motion as described above e Move the Z axis only at the current feed rate to the Z position e Dwell for the P number of sec
145. e or in a vise on the PCNC Work throughout on the Offsets screen If you have some TTS tools preset in the tool table then one of these must be the master tool In Program coord Load the master tool select tool 1 or tool 0 if you have 1 pee a non cutting master in the T DRO If it is a TTS tool and Length Touch 7 so already in the table then its length should be shown as 0 0 If it is not in the table them type 0 0 in the Length an press Enter to accept it Goto Tool Change Now set the work offset with it touching the work to Z 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 by any of the gauging methods described above polea l l l etc on off E Now jog the Z axis so you can load each tool holder in Alt T turn Enter its number into the T DRO Jog and gauge by Figure 6 21 Setting up a any of the touching methods already used but instead of conventional entering the gauged position into the Z axis DRO you tool holder as tool 4 must always enter it into the Touch Correction DRO and click the tool Touch button marked Length not any of those in the Work Offsets column Enter the diameter of the tool in the Tool Diameter DRO Do not forget that you have to press Enter to accept values typed into DROs What you are doing is setting the lengths of all the tools relative to the Master Tool Figure 6 21 shows this having been done for tool 4 6 4 7 Comments on Tool Offsets If you do not save the Tool Table then when you close dow
146. e space inside parentheses are considered a comment A left parenthesis always starts a comment The comment ends at the first right parenthesis found Using Tormach PCNC 1100 7 8 30625 Rev C3 1 Programming language reference thereafter Once a left parenthesis is placed on a line a matching right parenthesis must appear before the end of the line Comments may not be nested it is an error if a left parenthesis is found after the start of a comment and before the end of the comment Here is an example of a line containing a comment G80 M5 stop motion An alternative form of comment is to use the two characters The remainder of the line is treated as a comment Comments do not cause the machining system to do anything A comment contains a message if MSG appears after the left parenthesis and before any other printing characters Variants of MSG which include white space and lower case characters are allowed Note the comma which is required The rest of the characters before the right parenthesis are considered to be a message to the operator Messages are displayed on screen in the Error intelligent label 7 5 6 Item Repeats A line may have any number of G words but two G words from the same modal group may not appear on the same line A line may have zero to four M words Two M words from the same modal group may not appear on the same line For all other legal letters a line may have only one word beginning w
147. ear of the workpiece surface The P word can be negative or positive with the same meaning Before use of these codes the size of tapping head to be used and the pitch of the thread must be defined in the appropriated place on the Settings screen If the part program is running in Inch G20 mode then the pitch is taken as a number of threads per inch If it is metric G21 then the pitch will be in millimeters If the spindle speed is too high for the chosen pitch then an error message will be displayed and the cycle will not be performed The cycle operates as follows The currently set spindle speed and thread pitch are used to calculate the feed rate required to move the tap at the correct speed The corresponding feedrate for the high speed retraction of the tap is also calculated If this exceeds the available rapid rate then an error is displayed The tap is then fed downwards for the commanded depth P word At the end of the down feed the spindle is rapidly retracted by the appropriate distance for the size of the head in use This engages the reverse drive The spindle is then retracted at the higher reverse rate previously calculated for a distance sufficient to ensure the tap springs clear of the hole The Z axis is then positioned at the original height above the work ready to move to another hole or another tool and operation Note e The above explanation is slightly simplified from the actual code used to aid understandin
148. ed _ Spindle CW FS 5 5 greater than that displayed in Max Speed for the sy chosen pulley and the nearest legal value will be Coolant Ctrl C chosen Figure 5 13 Spindle speed The Hi Lo button toggles between the two belt pulley control family settings with the LEDs indicating the configuration spindle on left motor on right The maximum available speed is indicated Using Tormach PCNC 1100 5 8 30625 Rev C3 1 9 2 2 5 Machine controls The S and S buttons increase and decrease the value in the S DRO geometrically using a ratio of 1 15 for each click on the button This reflects the usual arrangement of gearbox in a manual machine tool The spindle can be started in a clockwise direction by the Spindle CW button An M code M4 in the MDI box is required if you want to select counterclockwise running The main LED above the Spindle CW button indicates that the spindle is running although actual movement may be inhibited by the key and or door interlocks The two LEDs that flank it indicate a Dwell while the spindle gets up to speed or fully stops The Coolant button and its associated LED control the coolant power outlet under the control cabinet Feed Control Family Units Min 0 0 Feed Units per Minute Feed Units per Revolution The F DRO gives the feed rate in current units Units Rev 0 0 inches millimeters per minute It is set by the F word in a part program or by typing into the F
149. ed in this manual but not acknowledged please notify Tormach LLC so this can be remedied in subsequent editions Using Tormach PCNC 1100 1 4 30625 Rev C3 1 Preface 1 5 Nomenclature This manual uses the following typographical nomenclature Software control Refers to a Control Software soft control 1 e a Windows control on the PC screen Hardware Control Refers to a physical button or switch on the Operator s Panel of the machine G code eg GO1X34 8 Used to show G code programs Key name e g Enter Tells you to press the indicated key 30635 Rev C3 1 1 5 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 2 2 1 2 1 1 Preparation Preparation This chapter describes the work required to unpack and to commission the hardware and software of the PCNC It contains a lot of detail but can be completed in one or two hours by a person familiar with CNC machines Enough detail is given here so that a beginner should be successful but some users may prefer to arrange for a machine tool expert to do this work If your machine has already been set up then you can skip this chapter Planning for Your PCNC Electrical Connection The PCNC 1100 is shipped with a 3 wire cord and no electrical plug There are several different NEMA National Electric Manufacturers Association and non NEMA plug patterns that can be used Straight blade patterns are common in household use twist lock patterns are more common in industrial l
150. ed rate or slower if the machine will not go that fast If GO is active the speed of motion is the current traverse rate or slower if the machine will not go that fast It is an error if e G53 is used without GO or G1 being active Using Tormach PCNC 1100 7 20 30625 Rev C3 1 7 7 18 7 7 19 7 7 20 7 7 21 Programming language reference e G53 is used while cutter radius compensation is on See relevant chapter for an overview of coordinate systems Select Work Offset Coordinate System G54 to G59 amp G59 P To select work offset 1 program G54 and similarly for the first six offsets The system number G code pairs are 1 G54 2 G55 3 G56 4 G57 5 G58 6 G59 To access any of the 254 work offsets 1 254 program G59 P where the P word gives the required offset number Thus G59 P5 is identical in effect to G58 It is an error if one of these G codes is used while cutter radius compensation is on See relevant chapter for an overview of coordinate systems Set Path Control Mode G61 and G64 Program G61 to put the machining system into exact stop mode or G64 for constant velocity mode It is OK to program for the mode that is already active These modes are described in detail above Coordinate system rotation G68 and G69 A rotation transformation can be applied to the controlled point coordinates commanded by a part program or by the MDI line To do this program G68 X Y R The X and
151. een the stepper motor and ball screw figure 2 9 As an alternative to adjust the Y axis to the front position before you fit the stepper motor you can temporarily clamp a length of 1 2 bar into the coupling and turn the bar with a pair of slip joint pliers figure 2 10 When you are ready to lift the machine you should remove the nuts from the four screws holding it down to the pallet Figure 2 8 Slinging geometry Y vey para Fixing to Stand The surface to which the machine is bolted must be flat Firmly bolting the machine to a surface that is not flat will stress the frame and must be avoided If necessary thin shims should be inserted at the holding down points so that bolting it down to the stand cannot distort the base This is important to preserve the accuracy Figure 2 9 Manual moving table by back of old of the PCNC1100 EAS Per Accessories You should now try out the positioning of the screen computer and coolant sub system if any Power to the PCNC The PCNC 1100 is powered by 230 volt single phase AC 50 or 60 Hz Auxiliary services like the control computer and Figure 2 10 Manual positioning of Y axis to coolant are separate and can be 115 or 230 balance machine Using Tormach PCNC 1100 2 6 30625 Rev C3 1 Preparation volts The main machine power lead is shipped in a protective tray Terminate it with a suitable plug for the wall outlet which you intend to use 2 6 Power
152. either off or auto positions In the Auto position outlet power is under program control the pump will run if the Control Program requests coolant Accessory Socket The Accessory socket is for connection of accessories such as a touch probe See Chapter 8 for details of the interface 30635 Rev C3 1 2 13 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 2 8 2 2 8 3 Preparation Changing the Spindle Speed Range The PCNC has two speed ranges The low range 350 to 1750 RPM is suitable for most machining operations with ferrous and other tough materials The high range 900 to 4500 RPM is suitable for small diameter cutters plastics and non ferrous materials The range change is performed by moving the V belt from the upper pair of pulleys high speed range to the lower pair low speed range lt wy s e aa baa J Ty x on are y ii Open the spindle drive door The interlock will prevent the motor from running Note Opening the spindle drive door will also stop a running spindle however this is a safety hazard and should not be used as a substitute for stopping the spindle with the spindle controls in the Control Software Use the rear handle to unlock the motor mounting plate and pull the motor forwards The belt will slacken and can be moved from one set of pulleys to the other figure 2 16 Figure 2 16 Changing spindle eya For the following tests select the low speed range by placing the belt o
153. en the three groups may be interleaved in any way without changing the meaning of the line For example the line g40 g01 3 15 so there 4 7 0 has five items and means exactly the same thing in any of the 120 possible orders such as 4 7 0 g01 3 15 g40 so there for the five items 7 5 8 Commands and Machine Modes The Control Software has many commands that cause a machining system to change from one mode to another The mode stays active until some other command changes it implicitly or 30635 Rev C3 1 7 9 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 Programming language reference explicitly Such commands are called modal For example if coolant is turned on it stays on until it is explicitly turned off The G codes for motion are also modal If a G1 straight move command is given on one line for example it will be executed again on the next line if one or more axis words is available on the line unless an explicit command is given on that next line using the axis words or canceling motion Non modal codes have effect only on the lines on which they occur For example G4 dwell is non modal 7 6 Modal Groups Modal commands are arranged in sets called modal groups and only one member of a modal group may be in force at any given time In general a modal group contains commands for which it is logically impossible for two members to be in effect at the same time e g measure in inches vs measure in millimete
154. ensation tool diameter alignment MOVE ooocccooccnonccnnoncnnnnnccnonannnoncnnnns Computer LED 28 30625 Rev C3 1 Appendices OM Conto AAA 5 2 Computer mounting ACCESSORIES erratas 2 3 GEE All SCMACUILG teens 2 3 Computer ON OFF control panel switch oooocccooccconncn 2 12 5 1 Computer LEQUIFEMIENIS t212 csncesnseeroreccnsnsasesedensanats 2 7 Concept behind PENE urna llar 1 3 Connecting control computer to PCNC 2 11 Constant velocity mode COR SOLUS niren ea S 7 21 purpose of explained aisne a 7 3 Control panel controls explained 2 12 Control Software Components OL ada 2 9 A EE 5 5 Controlled point AIN dilo 7 1 Conversation prograMmMIN8 ooccccoccnnoncnnononnnencnnnns 4 9 Coolant CONTOLOL siice ck ee tant taco hes tudentlecaudaldeaswenudees 7 3 control panel SwitCH oocccooccccoocnnnnncnnnos 2 13 importance of in CNCooooooccccnnccncnccnnnncnnonacnnnanons 2 2 MOT HUSO oda ci iaa 7 29 MOS flood on ooccccoocncnnnoccnnoniccnnoniccnnnnanonos 7 29 MOI TOT Ei Sein dere cia a 7 29 Coolant controls on control panel coooccccoccnnoncnnnnccnnoncnnnnns 5 2 Coordinate rotation by probing setting coordinate rotati0ON oocccooccccnocnnoncnnnns 8 10 Coordinate system rotation G68 setting and G68 clearIng 7 21 Coordinate systems AIG OLS CUS 95605 tnte Stes Saacieaen daa 6 1 TELCrENCS CEMMITLONS essi a aa 7 5 Co ordinated line
155. ent CNC controls It is an error if e Axis words are programmed when G80 is active unless a modal group O G code is programmed which uses axis words 7 7 23 Canned Cycles G81 to G89 The canned cycles G81 through G89 have been implemented as described in this section Two examples are given with the description of G81 below All canned cycles are performed with respect to the currently selected plane Any of the three planes XY YZ and ZX may be selected Throughout this section most of the descriptions assume the X Y plane has been selected The behavior is always analogous if the YZ or XZ plane is selected Rotational axis words are allowed in canned cycles but it is better to omit them If rotational axis words are used the numbers must be the same as the current position numbers so that the rotational axes do not move All canned cycles use X Y R and Z numbers in the NC code These numbers are used to determine X Y R and Z positions The R usually meaning retract position is along the axis perpendicular to the currently selected plane Z axis for XY plane X axis for YZ plane Y axis for XZ plane Some canned cycles use additional arguments For canned cycles we will call a number sticky if when the same cycle is used on several lines of code in a row the number must be used the first time but is optional on the rest of the lines Sticky numbers keep their value on the rest of the lines if they are not expli
156. eset to 100 The LED warns if an override is in operation The control software will apply any changes in feed rate override as quickly as possible This could be very important if you decide you have too high a feed rate for safety To optimize performance the software keeps a queue of moves ready to be implemented It is possible if you increase the federate that you will make one of these queued moves be faster than the PCNC can move or accelerate and so it will loose steps The best strategy is to write the part program to run at the highest anticipated feed rate and use the override to reduce it produce the best operating conditions 30635 Rev C3 1 5 9 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 Machine Controls The FRO DRO displays the calculated result of applying the percentage override to the set feed rate 5 2 2 6 Program Running Control Family These controls handle the execution of a loaded part program or Set Next Line 2 CHANGE TOOL Cycle Start AI R the commands on an ee 8 ine 0 Two flute ballnose MDI line figure 5 15 Stop Alt S Run From Here ZO _ 2 000 E 0 0000 Safety warning Note _ Goto Tool Change Tool Change Edit Save table How that the Cycle Start Work Offset Gh ne y aa Pause spe Block Delete 2 m1 Optional Stop start t En Ignore blocks M01 Break axis movement Figure 5 15 Program running family Cycle Start Rewind CtrlW Single BLK AH Stop Stop halts axis moti
157. estination point at the current traverse rate or slower if the machine will not go that fast It is expected that cutting will not take place when a GOO command is executing b If G16 has been executed to set a Polar Origin then for rapid linear motion to a point described by a radius and angle GO X Y can be used X is the radius of the line from the 30635 Rev C3 1 7 11 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 Programming language reference Summary of G codes G00 Rapid positioning Apply tool length offset plus Cancel tool length offset Reset all scale factors to 1 0 Set axis data input scale factors Temporary coordinate system offsets Move in absolute machine coordinate system Use fixture offset 1 Use fixture offset 2 G56 58 Use fixture offset 3 4 5 G68 G69 Coordinate system rotation Canned cycle peck drilling Cancel motion mode including canned cycles 82 Canned cycle drilling Canned cycle drilling with dwell Inverse time feed mode Feed per minute mode Feed per rev mode G98 Initial level return after canned cycles G99 R point level return after canned cycles FP m fi ll aft MX Ml Using Tormach PCNC 1100 7 12 30625 Rev C3 1 1 7 2 7 7 3 7 7 3 1 Programming language reference G16 polar origin and Y is the angle in degrees measured with increasing values counterclockwise from the 3 o clock direction 1 e the conventional four quadrant conventions Coordinates of the
158. everal tiMes cccceeeeeseeeeeeeeees 7 29 Subroutine label TOMA Onion conce alice caida 7 6 Subroutine return A T aemasecanseeaeeees 7 30 Support OM OM io occ iros can unos ads 9 1 SS VEC He MAA ise 2 11 Syntax Code definition ooccccoccncnncnnononnnonnnnnns 7 11 System specification iia 9 3 T Word 1001 Selec ai 7 31 Tapping sequence for threading a hole 8 13 Tapping heads description of the heads oocccooccccncccnonccnno 8 13 Tedch control family aida 5 13 Testing Control Software installation 2 10 DiverTest progra oocccconcnnconcnnnncnnononnnonccnnnnss 2 10 Tool change supplied M6 MAacroS ooccccocccconcnncnncnnoncnnnnanoss 7 29 Tool change position O A II 7 30 Tool CHAN OA tadas 5 3 Tool diameter correction coooccccoocnnoncnncnnnnnoncnnnns 6 9 Tool length setting by tool Setter ooooocccooccconccnnonnnnnns 8 7 Tool length offset A AAA teatdetuidoolles 6 10 E A E 7 19 A O 7 19 A A O 7 19 TOOLS iii iia 6 7 Tool select Io A Mamtden st aslet 7 31 Tool setters and probes c oooccccoccnnonccnnnocnnonccnnns 8 3 30635 Rev C3 1 33 Toolchange position control family 5 14 Toolpath display looks Inaccurate oooocccooccccnccnnoncnnnns 5 11 Tormach Jog Shuttle controller 5 8 Tormach Tooling System A fap ct bacco so O 5 3 Touching technIQUES oooocccooccn
159. ewind code The number of passes you require 1s entered into the Cycles DRO The initial lowest Z position is put into Z inhibit note this will often be negative and the distance Z is to move down each cycle is put into Z Step usually positive The On Off button enables the feature 30635 Rev C3 1 5 13 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 5 2 2 12 5 2 2 13 5 2 2 14 Machine Controls The Multipass button will prompt for the values by a series of dialogs rather than requiring the Mil 515 GeO 61 G40 620 690 Gud God 43 Gud 664 Figure 5 22 Current modes display DROs to be filled in Modes and Mode Alarm Control Family These families display the current modes of the Control Software and an alarm LED for unusual modes The alarm is on the Diagnostics screen Click on the flashing LED to see a list of unusual modes figure 5 22 These modes might arise from running a part program produced by a CAD CAM system not customized for all the features of the PCNC List of Abnormalities OffLine Currently Active 5 Click on LED for details An unusual mode does not imply a fault in E T gee a your system simply a hint of what to look for current state as Normal Gives a quick check on unexpected WJ lachiMetric etc if unusual things are happening figure 5 23 Figure 5 23 Unusual modes display If for any reason the standard modes do not on Diagnostics suit your normal working then by double clic
160. explicit numbers In these rules a digit 1s a single character between 0 and 9 e A number consists of 1 an optional plus or minus sign followed by 2 zero to many digits followed possibly by 3 one decimal point followed by 4 zero to many digits provided that there is at least one digit somewhere in the number e There are two kinds of numbers integers and decimals An integer does not have a decimal point in 1t a decimal does e Numbers may have any number of digits subject to the limitation on line length Only about seventeen significant figures will be retained however enough for all known applications e A non zero number with no sign as the first character is assumed to be positive Notice that initial before the decimal point and the first non zero digit and trailing after the decimal point and the last non zero digit zeros are allowed but not required A number written with initial or trailing zeros will have the same value when it is read as if the extra zeros were not there Numbers used for specific purposes by the Control Software are often restricted to some finite set of values or some to some range of values In many uses decimal numbers must be close to integers this includes the values of indexes for parameters and carousel slot numbers for example M codes and G codes multiplied by ten A decimal number which is supposed to be close to an integer is considered close enough if it is within 0 0001
161. f e A negative T number is used or a T number larger than 255 is used Order of Execution The order of execution of items on a line is critical to safe and effective machine operation Items are executed in the order shown in figure 7 5 if they occur on the same line If you wish to impose a different order e g to turn coolant off before the spindle is stopped just code the commands on separate blocks Error Handling This section describes error handling in the Control Software The Control Software tends to ignore things that it does not understand If a command does not work as expected or does not do anything check that you have typed it correctly Common mistakes are GO instead of GO e letter O instead of zero and too many decimal points in 30635 Rev C3 1 7 31 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 Programming language reference Comment Gnetudng message Set feed rate F ra Seapine speed 6 Tool change M6 and Execute M code macros 7 Spindle On Off M3 M4 M5 o CI A MB M9 Enable disable a MAS M49 o been eS 13 Cutter radius compensation On Off G40 G41 G42 a Tool able offset On Or G43 G49 Fixture table select G54 55 8 amp G59 P Te en path contra mode Gel GS 660 Home change coordinate system data G10 or set offsets G92 G94 Perform motion GO to G3 G12 G13 G80 to G89 as modified by G53 21 Stop or repeat MO M1 M2 M30 M47 M99 es Table 7 5 Order of execution o
162. f canned cycle which can be used to produce a circular hole larger than the tool in use or with a suitable tool like a woodruff key cutter to cut internal grooves for O rings etc Program G12 I for a clockwise move and G13 I for a counterclockwise move The tool is moved in the X direction by the value of the I word and a circle cut in the direction specified with the original X and Y coordinates as the center The tool is returned to the center e Its effect is undefined if the current plane is not XY 7 7 7 Exit and Enter Polar Mode G15 and G16 It is possible for GO and G1 moves in the X Y plane only to specify coordinates as a radius and angle relative to a temporary center point program G1 6 to enter this mode The current coordinates of the controlled point are the temporary center Program G15 to revert to normal Cartesian coordinates SO 4220 Y 220 normal GO move to 2 0 2 0 G16 start of polar mode GLO XLU YA this will move to X 2 7071 Y 2 7071 which is a spot on a circle of radius 1 0 at 45 degrees from the initial COOrdmiates OL 2 057 lios This can be very useful for example for drilling a circle of holes The code below moves to a circle of holes every 10 degrees on a circle of radius 5 0 center X 1 0 Y 5 5 and peck drills to Z 0 6 GOP ALSO Oo G16 GL X50 YO polar move to a radius of 5 0 angle 0 deg G83 Z 0 6 peck drill G1 Y10 A ten degrees from original center
163. f commands on a line numbers The Control Software does not check for axis over travel unless software limits are in use or excessively high feeds or speeds Nor does it does not detect situations where a legal command does something unfortunate such as machining a fixture Using Tormach PCNC 1100 7 32 30625 Rev C3 1 8 Machine upgrades and configuration Machine Upgrades and Configuration 8 1 8 1 2 1 8 1 2 2 Fourth Axis Rotary Table The fourth axis can be used as a rotary table 1 e with its axis of rotation parallel to the Z axis or more commonly as a dividing indexing head with its axis of rotation parallel to the X axis Installing the Electronics Full details for installing the electronics for the optional rotary table are supplied in the form of a Service Bulletin with the installation kit Utilizing the Fourth Axis Referencing and Zeroing the Fourth Axis The Tormach rotary table does not have a built in home switch When you are setting it up if the initial position is important then you should use the and keys on the numeric keypad to jog it into position When in a suitable position click Zero A This will set the A DRO to zero in the current work offset system If you use multiple work offsets then you should Zero A in all of them It is possible to provide a home switch in conjunction with a fixture on the fourth axis and interface it to the PCNC using the Accessory socket on the control
164. f making an entry is available figure 6 27 First pick a convex corner D Decide which way you want to go along the contour from D In our example we are keeping the tool to the left of the contour and going next towards F Extend the line FD if the next part of the contour is an arc extend the tangent to arc FD from D to divide the area outside the contour near D into two regions Make sure the center of the tool is currently in the region on the same side of the extended line as the material inside the contour near D If not move the tool into that region In the example point E represents the current location of the center of the tool Since it is on the same side of line DF as the shaded triangle no additional move is needed Now write a line of NC code that turns compensation on and moves to point D D 2 2 Figure 6 27 Simple entry move N0010 G41 Gl X2 Y2 turn compensation on and make entry move This method will also work at a concave corner on a toolpath contour if the actual tool is oversized but it will fail with a toolpath contour if the tool is undersized Note We should re iterate that it is much better for a CAM program to generate the path of the tool allowing for its diameter because it can see the implications of cutting complex corners in a way which the control software cannot Using Tormach PCNC 1100 6 16 30625 Rev C3 1 Programming language reference 7 Part programming Language Reference
165. f the machine control cabinet If you set the BIOS CMOS configuration in your computer to start the computer when it sees AC power then the console switch will allow you to start the computer from the console You should not shut off the computer from this switch due to issues with the Microsoft Windows operating system but you can turn the computer on from the keyboard screen controls The machine itself requires a 230 volt single phase wall power outlet rated at 6 amps 13 amps inrush You should also provide a separate wall outlet for 115 or 230 volts depending on your locality to act as power source for the computer monitor and coolant pump if used which should be specified to suit you local voltage Learning and Training The final element of planning your installation is to consider the training that you and any other users of the machine will need This manual will give you the basic information required to start manufacturing components with you PCNC You must however expect to have to invest time in learning how to achieve the best results The areas which you will find easy and those which will require more effort will of course depend on your background you might be most comfortable with machining or with component design or even with information technology We believe that you will find it highly cost effective to acquire additional training materials for areas of CAD CAM CNC which are new to you Tormach sales can help point
166. f you see a similar screen to figure 2 12 everything is working well so close the DriverTest program and skip to the section Running the PCNC below Windows experts might be interested to see a few other things The white rectangular window is a type of timing analyzer When it is running it displays a line with small variations indicated These variations are the changes in timing from one interrupt cycle to another There should be no lines longer than s or so on an 17 screen on most systems Even if there are variations its possible they are below the threshold necessary to create timing jitters so when your machine tool is connected you should perform a movement test to see if jogging and G00 G01 moves are smooth You may have one of three things happen to you when running the test which may indicate a problem 1 Screen shows wide variation or clearly periodic variation of timing In this case you need to complete a computer optimization detailed in Appendix 3 section 10 3 of this manual 2 Driver not found or installed contact Art This means that the driver is not loaded into Windows for some reason This can occur on XP systems which have a corruption of their driver database reloading Windows is the cure in this case 3 When the system says taking over 3 2 1 and then reboots one of two things has occurred Either you did not reboot when asked told you or the driver is corrupted or unable to be used in yo
167. fferent specific units Spindle speed is measured in revolutions per minute The positions of rotational axes are measured in degrees Feed rates are expressed in current length units per minute or in degrees per minute as described above Warning We advise you to check very carefully the system s response to changing units while tool and fixture offsets are loaded into the tables while these offsets are active and or while a part program is executing 7 1 12 Current Position The controlled point is always at some location called the current position and the Control Software always knows where that is The numbers representing the current position are adjusted in the absence of any axis motion if any of several events take place e Length units are changed see Warning above e Tool length offset is changed e Coordinate system offsets are changed 7 1 13 Selected Plane There is always a selected plane which must be the XY plane the YZ plane or the XZ plane of the machining system The Z axis is of course perpendicular to the X Y plane the X axis to the YZ plane and the Y axis to the XZ plane 7 1 14 Tool Table Zero or one tool is assigned to each slot in the tool table 7 1 15 Path Control Modes The machining system may be put into any one of two path control modes 1 exact stop mode 2 constant velocity mode In exact stop mode the machine stops briefly at the end of each programmed move In constant ve
168. figure 5 4 Figure 5 3 TTS presetting e Screwed shank cutter collet chuck Clarkson Posilok type allows you to exchange a cutter while maintaining a known length as the center hole at the back end of the cutter registers in the chuck figure 5 5 e ER or similar collet accepts a l Figure 5 4 L R8 tool holder wide range of cutter diameters but the length of the tool is not accurately repeatable so the offset needs to be reset after each tool change figure 5 6 e RS collet gives the shortest overhang from the spindle nose but requires an individual collet for each tool diameter and as with ER collets length is not repeatable The tool changing procedure is slightly different depending on the tool holders you have Changing R8 Tools Open the spindle drive cover Swing the spindle locking fork so it engages with the flats on the upper part of the spindle You will have to turn the spindle a little to get it to line up The locked spindle is shown in figure 5 7 Figure 5 6 ER32 collet tool holder To remove any installed tools 30635 Rev C3 1 9 3 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 Machine Controls e Wipe any debris from the spindle nose and the tool being removed to avoid any risk of it getting into the spindle bore e Using the supplied 13 mm wrench on the squared end loosen the drawbar by about one turn Tap the end of it with a copper faced hammer to disengage the R taper e While ho
169. for Machine Accessories There is an IEC inlet on the bottom of the control cabinet for the computer coolant This should be connected to a GFI Ground Fault Interrupt wall Coolant outlet This separate supply pump Y like the main machine supply is controlled by the main power switch but allows use of 115 volt accessories on a 230 volt mill The 115 VAC outlet under the panel that is furthest from the column feeds the coolant pump and is controlled by the CNC Figure 2 11 Power and interface connectors software The pair of similar outlets nearer the column is switched by the Computer switch on the front panel Both the 115 VAC power and ground are autonomous from the main machine power and ground 230 VAC in order to allow correct operation of the ground fault interrupter GFI The computer control of the coolant outlet is accomplished by an isolated relay Refer to the upper portion of the circuit diagram in section 10 2 for details wire numbers 200 through 207 2 7 Control Computer and Software Installation 2 7 1 Computer Specification You need to provide a computer running Microsoft Windows XP Home or Professional edition Consult Tormach LLC for information on use of the PCNC with Windows Vista The system does not require a particularly powerful computer but there are certain requirements for optimal operation You should have e ACPU running at least 1 GHz with at least 256 megabytes of RAM Intel and AMD pro
170. ft the machine These should be solid steel bars not pipes and be 34 or s in diameter Figure 2 7 Hoist bar for slinging the mill 2 4 1 2 Lifting from Above The alternative way to mount your PCNC to a stand involves lifting from above The eye in the top of the column is suitable for lifting the machine but it is not in line with the center of gravity The machine will tilt when lifted solely from the eye The alternative is to sling the machine using a combination of the eye and an eye in a T nut on the table using a Tormach special tool part number 30576 Machine Hoist Bar figure 2 7 30635 Rev C3 1 2 5 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 2 4 2 2 4 3 2 5 Preparation Figure 2 8 shows the geometry of the slinging The table should be as far away from the column and as far to the right as possible to optimize the balance It is most important that the machine is not lifted by the control cabinet or by any of the protruding stepper motors or the head or the table Incorrect rigging of the sling will likely result in serious damage to the PCNC 1100 The optimal balance for lifting should be checked with the machine an inch or two off the floor The X Y and Z axes can easily be moved by hand if the covers on their coupling boxes are removed The smooth 1 e outside face of an old auto engine timing belt or poly vee auxiliary drive belt which has been cut to make a strip can be used to turn the coupling betw
171. ftware It is a very big topic whose surface we try to skim Using Tormach PCNC 1100 4 2 30625 Rev C3 1 From an idea to a part The two most important points are that a the PCNC because of its open and standard architecture will run the part programs produced by virtually all Computer Aided Design Computer Aided Manufacture CAD CAM software and b that the more comprehensive the software that you use the greater will be your and the PCNC s productivity and the better the quality of the parts made A common mistake is to purchase inadequate design software and then have to discard it and the investment made in learning to use it The Control Software itself includes features for defining and cutting simple parts like keyways rectangular and circular pockets or a plane face by conversational Wizards You will be able to do useful work with these features but you will get better control and documentation of your parts be using a dedicated CAD CAM system Some software integrates the drawing CAD and G code production CAM functions but it is equally common to use different programs from different suppliers for the two functions It is perfectly possible and often efficient to design using a 3D CAD package and machine with a 2 2D CAM package 4 3 1 3D CAD 3D CAD software has the biggest range of purchase cost and the steepest learning curve If you want to produce true 3D parts like molds then you have no option but to buy the
172. ftware and just about any application software that you do not use or recognize Your mill computer should be 2 System Configuration Utility General SYSTEM INI WIN INT BOOT INI Services Startup gt MEadobe LM Service Unknown Stopped lean and clean and void O Autodesk Data Manage Unknown Running of any unnecessary O autodesk EDM Server Unknown Running O Autodesk Licensing Service Unknown Stopped programs O 1d Stringi 6844F930 Unknown Running g O FLExnet Licensing Service Unknown Stopped L Click Start button O InstallDriver Table Mana Unknown Stopped 2 Click Run O Machine Debug Manager Unknown Running O sol Server AUTODESK Unknown Running 3 Type MS CONFIG O NWIDIA Display Driver Se AWIDIA Corporation Running and press Enter O Remote Solver for COSM Unknown Running O Sophos Anti virus status Linknown Running 4 Click Services tab 5 On the lower line check the box for Hide All Microsoft Services step 1 then Disable All step 2 finally click on Apply step 3 TWARE Sore Windows Currentver rii nstall TWARE Microsoft Windows Currentyer RUNDLLS2 EXE Cw HELM SOF 6 Now click on the O SOUNDMAN SOUNDMAN EXE HELMISOFT WARE Microsofti Windows Currentier Startup tab O mmg CrWINDOWSLIME m HKLMSOFTWARE Microsofth Windows Currenter 7 Click on Disa b le O Imscinst CoWINDOWSisystem HELMISOFT WARE Microsoft MtindowsCurrentiler
173. g e For best results especially for deep holes and blind tapping the spindle speed chosen should be checked with a tachometer to ensure it 1s as near the commanded S word speed as possible Goto Toolchange Position M998 Execution of M998 will send the machine to the tool change position The tool change position is defined on the Settings screen The Z axis will move first then X and Y An entry of 9999 will disable the axis Execution of this function requires the machine to be referenced Homed User Defined M codes If any M code is used which is not in the above list of built in codes then the Control Software will attempt to find a file named Mxx m1S in the Macros folder If it finds the file then it will execute the Visual Basic script program it finds within it Using Tormach PCNC 1100 7 30 30625 Rev C3 1 7 10 7 10 1 7 10 2 7 10 3 7 11 7 12 Programming language reference The Operator gt Macros menu item displays a dialog which allows you to see the currently installed macros to Load Edit and Save or Save As the text The dialog also has a Help button which will display the Visual Basic functions which can be called to control the Control Software For example you can interrogate the position of axes move axes interrogate input signals and control output signals New macros can be written using an external editor program like Notepad and saved in the Macros folder or you can load an existing ma
174. geometry between the two types and the values for diameters in the tool table will be different for the two types Material Edge Contour When the contour is the edge of the material the outline of the edge is described in the part program For a material edge contour the value for the diameter in the tool table is the actual value of the diameter of the tool The value in the table must be positive The NC code for a material edge contour is the same regardless of the actual or intended diameter of the tool Example 1 Here is an NC program which cuts material away from the outside of the triangle figure 6 23 In this example the cutter compensation radius is the actual radius of the tool in use which is 0 5 The value for the diameter in the tool table is twice the radius which is 1 0 N0010 G41 Gl X2 Y2 turn compensation on and make entry move N0020 Y 1 follow right side of triangle N0030 X 2 follow bottom side of triangle NOO40 X2 Y2 follow hypotenuse of triangle NO050 G40 turn compensation off This will result in the tool following a path consisting of an entry move and the path shown on the left going clockwise around the triangle Notice that the coordinates of the triangle of 30635 Rev C3 1 6 13 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 material appear in the NC code Notice also that the toolpath includes three arcs which are not explicitly programmed they are generated automatically 6 6 3 2 Toolpath Contour When th
175. he result of these steps 7 Double click on ECP Printer Port LPT 1 wording may differ depending on your system If you are looking for a plug in card then the card name will probably appear in the title 8 Choose the Resources tab and take note of the first number under Setting that corresponds with the first Resource Type I O Range figure 9 14 This shows the standard value for a motherboard port A PCI post will not start with a zero it will probably be something like CD80 as it is a hexadecimal number it can have digits A B C D E or F in it Write down the four numbers and or letters This is your Printer port address in Hex 30635 Rev C3 1 9 11 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 Appendices ais i te a CorelDRAW 6 Inkscape a E Control Panel loj x f gt eld Acrob File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Visual Stud NET 200 des an Kp Back leg y Search Ye Folders Ez gt News Rovi Fia ae Microsoft Ee Mame Tomme visual Ba Corel Adobe Ja Cantral Panel 2 Fonts Add ct HOTO PAINT Photoshop E Game Controllers Add re asme 5 G Switch to Category view Y internet Options Config a PR H Slava JavatT eee Microsoft i 3 7 Microsoft lol x System Properties File z System Restore Auton akan Remote de Bs General Computer Mame Advanced ly Device Manager Micre SE The Device Manager lists all the hardware devices installed Wie o
176. hen the system 1s Reset the LED glows steadily Error and Profile Information The Machine OK LED indicates that the PCNC is started 30635 Rev C3 1 5 5 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 Machine Controls The intelligent labels display the last error message the current modes the file name of the currently loaded part program if any and the Profile that is in use The Clear button clears the text from the error line The entries written to the error line are logged in the file C PCNC3 LastErrors txt This can be opened and inspected with a text editor like Notepad if you want to analyze a history of events Screen Selection Buttons These buttons switch the display from screen to screen You are viewing the screen whose label is blue The keyboard shortcuts are given after the names For clarity they are letters are shown in upper case You should not however use the shift key when pressing the shortcut 5 2 2 2 Axis Control Family This family is concerned with the current position of the tool or more precisely the controlled point figure 5 10 The axes have the following controls Coordinate Value DROs These are displayed in the current units inch metric G20 G21 The value is the coordinate of the controlled point in the displayed coordinate system This will generally be the coordinate system of the current Work Offset initially 1 1 e G54 together with any Tool length offset and G52 G92 offsets applied
177. histicated CAM program will give you a choice of views of the finished part and the path of the tool as it is manufactured Figure 4 8 is a screen shot of TurboCADCAM and shows the toolpath for one version of the slot It is shown in a plan view together with a pane which displays the G code generated to perform the operation Figure 4 9 is the result of retyping the radius of the end of the slot as 0 15 and displaying a rendered isometric view of the part The G code moved into a smaller pane for clarity on the rendered view was automatically updated to reflect the new slot width fi ss Pes sigs GAC mc sen aay BO hs gt Be Sle Bo 14h ra Bla P y E T1 fem y Operation 1 1892 Y 1 7348 56306 MO3 21 MOS OPERATION NAME OPERATION 1 F31 5 MILLING POCKET copay om nen 1 7249 70 Model 9 Paver 1 KN Figure 4 9 Rendered Isometric view of narrower keyhole slot 30635 Rev C3 1 4 5 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 From an Idea to a part 4 3 4 Running the G code 4 3 5 G01 X 0 0598 Y 3 1447 F mMach3 CNC Controller File Config Function Cfg s View Wizards Operator Help Opens Recent Change G Code l ReLoad Close Mill gt 615 62 617 G40 G20 G90 G94 G54 G43 G99 G64 G97 Jog ON OFF Ctri Alt J G02 X 0 1102 Y 3 1447 Z 0 2 1 L a Ee AN G01 X 0 1102 Y 2 1547 Z 0 2 X 0 0598 a Mm G02 X 0 0892 Y 1 7348 Z 0 2 I ia se G01 X 0 0877 Y 1 70482 02 Y
178. idge Assembly use PN 30505 Motor Lock Assembly includes callout numbers 5 6 7 8 9 and 10 Annular Bearing Engineering Council identification D7007C DT double tandem pair Annular Bearing Engineering Council identification ABEC7202B P5 PCNC 1100 30204 Electrical Overview March 2007 D40135 CABINET 4 digit serial numbers TORMACH MACHINE CONTROL BOARD RIGHT SIDE INSIDE BOX INSIDE DOOR CABINET 3 digit serial numbers TORMACH MACHINE CONTROL BOARD RIGHT SIDE INSIDE BOX INSIDE DOOR OPERATOR PANEL all serial numbers Number Description ID Number Desoripfon 6 30459 Transformer XFM2 o 30462 Esopp D 0 0o 10 30463 Push button PB2 0 oS 11 30464 Key switch with keys SW7 30627 Flex Conduit 16 mmOD 1230465 Relay contactorci 30628 Connector for 16 mm fex 1330466 Relay Contactor C2 30722 Flex Conduit T2mmOD 1430467 Electrical cabinet iatch amp key 30723 Connector for 12 mm flex 15 30468 Capacitor 30728 Flex Conduit 10mm OD 16 30469 Filter 80729 Connector for 10 mm flex 1730178 Accessory Probe Port 30470 Tormach Logo vinyl 1830179 Potentiometer 30471_ PONC 1100 Logo vinyl 19 30181 Knob 80222 Label Belt Position _ 20 30180 LED CSC 830223 Label Machine Safety 21 30163 VFD Motor Driver 80224 Label Dual Power Safety 22 30661 DCBusBoard S 30225 Label Retain Voltage Safety 30164 Stepper
179. ime feed rate G93 mode is being used e For motion involving one or more of the linear axes X Y Z and optionally A B C without simultaneous rotational axis motion the feed rate means length units per minute along the programmed linear X YZ ABC path e For motion involving one or more of the linear axes X Y Z and optionally A B C with simultaneous rotational axis motion the feed rate means length units per minute along the programmed linear X YZ ABC path combined with the angular velocity of the rotary axes multiplied by the appropriate axis Correction Diameter multiplied by pi where TT 3 14152 1 e the declared circumference of the part e For motion of one rotational axis with X Y and Z axes not moving the feed rate means degrees per minute rotation of the rotational axis e For motion of two or three rotational axes with X Y and Z axes not moving the rate is applied as follows Let dA dB and dC be the angles in degrees through which the A B and C axes respectively must move Let D sqrt dA dB dC Conceptually D is a measure of total angular motion using the usual Euclidean metric Let T be the amount of time required to move through D degrees at the current feed rate in degrees per minute The rotational axes should be moved in coordinated linear motion so that the elapsed time from the start to the end of the motion is T plus any time required for acceleration or deceleration 7 1 8 Ar
180. ind that it increases their productivity especially on short run jobs requiring a lot of setting up of workpiece and tooling The four buttons starting at the left are allocated to select jogging of axes X Y Z and A respectively A LED beside an axis DRO indicates that this axis is the one that will be jogged The fifth button cycle through the available jog step sizes Alternatively you can type a step size into the Step DRO Continuous jogging is performed by Figure 5 12 Tormach Jog Shuttle Controller turning the spring loaded ring counterclockwise for the minus direction and clockwise for the plus direction There are seven speeds in geometric ratio from very slow to full speed so you can position any axis with great speed and precision www tormach com The inner wheel with finger dimple will jog by one Step as defined in the Step DRO for each click The move will be made at the current feed rate Spindle Speed Control Family The machine spindle can be controlled in two ways a by hand or b by switching to Auto on Operator s HGH Li Y panel thus making the speed and direction set by the nl Ee Control Software Max Speed 1750 RPM This control family 1s only important for case b S 30 The S DRO has its value set when an S word is used in a part program It is the desired spindle speed It can also be set by typing into the DRO figure 5 13 It is an error to try to set it in either way to a spe
181. ine Coordinates Coordinates are simply how you describe where the tool is positioned We assume that you have the computer and PCNC setup and switched on and are looking at the Simple screen Referencing the Machine You have seen that jogging the machine moves the tool and this changes the numbers in the X Y and Z axis DROs You may have wondered where these numbers come from and indeed doubted that they are very sensible The answer is that they are probably meaningless The computer has no way of knowing yet where the tool or table 1s positioned Referencing is the process which puts the gt machine in a known mechanical position Ala and sets the corresponding axis DROs X 1 52 9 1 pa an The known position is where the limit switches operate with Z at the top of the Y 3 y O 3 3 column and the spindle over the bottom left hand corner of the table This position Z 2 2 2 O O 1s called Home and so these limit switches are called the Home switches Their Machine Coords operation is very obvious on the Z axis A software trick makes the X and Y Figure 3 1 The axis DROS un referenced arrangement slightly harder to understand but this is of no importance at present Figure 3 1 shows how the DROs might look when you start up the system They have arbitrary values in them and the three screen LEDs are red Check that the LEDs by the red Reset button are not flashing and that nothing is in the way of m
182. ion ccccccsscccceseeceeeceenceeaeseeeenseeeeseeeenseeaes 7 23 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 iv 30625 Rev C3 1 Contents a ME ltd 7 23 ia ln nda da diodes ato 7 24 A A a Ball ARA A or meee rere tere eee erie renner rere nner tere 7 24 ao NO nda oda dolida ad 7 25 IO Ciclo Esc ida oda dolio td ad 7 25 lao o Enola oda dolio ad 7 25 T E Er EAU AA o PP or meee rere eure eee errr reer ener reer a nnrer te Te 7 25 Tht Distance Mode GIO ad GI Deoria a A A 7 26 LAZY G92 Offsets G92 G92176922 and GO 2D uresen nenia dias a 7 26 7 7 26 Feed Rate Mode G93 G94 and G95 woo cccecsecsccscescscescnsescesescesensescusescesensessuse 7 27 1 1 27 Canned Cycle Return Level G9sand G99 ia 7 27 7 8 Buber M C0dES anesse enos oeieo asses S ENa E E E TEE Eaa 7 27 7 8 1 Program Stopping and Ending MO Ml M2 and M3BO ocoooccccnccnncnccnnoncnnoncnnnonccnonccnnnnnoss 7 27 7 8 2 Spindle Control M3 M4 and MO oooccncnoccncnccnnonccnnnncnnoncnnnonnonononnnonncnnnrononnnnnnanononncnnnanoss 7 28 Ter COOL CUA A oats staal EE TE TE 7 29 7 8 4 Coolant Control M7 M8 and M9 wooo cece eceeceecsccececceccsceccscccscescesescesescesceseseesen 7 29 TOD Re run from First Line M47 cok a te da ita aid tee 7 29 7 8 6 Override Control M48 and M49 LL ooccccooncnnnconccnnconcnnnnoncnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnanannnnns 7 29 od Call Subroutine NO Bae cies st watches ii uence 7 29 7 8 8 Return from Subroutine M99
183. irst group on the table is a group of G codes for motion One of these is always in effect That one is called the current motion mode It is an error to put a G code from group 1 and a G code from group O on the same line if both of them use axis words If an axis word using G code from group is implicitly in effect on a line by having been activated on an earlier line and a group O G code that uses axis words appears on the line the activity of the group 1 G code is suspended for that line The axis word using G codes from group 0 are G10 G28 G30 and G92 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 7 10 30625 Rev C3 1 Programming language reference The Control Software displays the current mode at the top of each screen 7 7 G codes G codes of the CS input language are shown in figure 7 3 and are described in more detail in this section The descriptions contain command prototypes set in courier type In the command prototypes the tilde stands for a real value As described earlier a real value may be 1 an explicit number 4 4 for example 2 an expression 2 2 4 for example 3 a parameter value 88 for example or 4 a unary function value acos 0 for example In most cases if axis words any or all of X Y Z A Br Cr U V W are given they specify a destination point Axis numbers relate to the currently active coordinate system unless explicitly described as being in the absolute coordinate system Where axis
184. is removed by clicking the Clear Rot button by typing 0 into the angle DRO or by using a G69 command Probe Calibration For the probe readings to be meaningful the center of the probing tip ball needs to lie on the centerline of the spindle The Tormach probe has three set screws which are used to adjust this alignment Most other probes will have similar features although the pitch of the threads and the orientation of the screws may differ and so require alteration to the details of this procedure To align the probe tip you need a hole about 1 2 diameter and 34 or so deep machined in a block of material so that it is perpendicular to the bottom face of the block Figure 8 20 Point 3 Cable left The hole should be as circular as possible so ideally be reamed or bored on a lathe If it is produced on a lathe then having a through hole and facing the end provides the accurate bottom face A rough setting can be made using the TTS Measurement Fixture p n 30140 although its bore 1s not finish machined e Insert the probe in the machine spindle in the collet with which it will be used so that the connector and cable are on the right X direction Leave the spindle lock on e Work using the Comp X Y Probing screen Zero the Point 1 DROs as it is not used Select Point 2 and use the round yellow centre finding button to record the center of the alignment bore This is illustrated in figure 8 19 e Rotate the spindl
185. istance mode axis numbers X Y Z A usually represent positions in terms of the currently active coordinate system Any exceptions to that rule are described explicitly in this section describing G codes To go into incremental distance mode program G91 In incremental distance mode axis numbers X Y Z A usually represent increments from the current values of the numbers I and J numbers always represent increments regardless of the distance mode setting K numbers represent increments 7 7 25 G92 Offsets G92 G92 1 G92 2 and G92 3 See the chapter on coordinate systems for full details You are strongly advised not to use this legacy feature on any axis where there is another offset applied To make the current point have the coordinates you want without motion program G92 X Y Z A where the axis words contain the axis numbers you want All axis words are optional except that at least one must be used If an axis word is not used for a given axis the coordinate on that axis of the current point is not changed It is an error if all axis words are omitted G52 and G92 use common internal mechanisms in the CS and may not be used together When G92 is executed the origin of the currently active coordinate system moves To do this origin offsets are calculated so that the coordinates of the current point with respect to the moved origin are as specified on the line containing the G92 In addition parameters 5211 to 5
186. it The direction is determined by the setting of the Forward Reverse switch Forward corresponds to clockwise rotation of the spindle You can safely switch direction while the spindle is turning Coolant The Coolant switch controls the power from the coolant pump outlet on the underside of the control cabinet In the Off position the pump does not run In the On position it runs irrespective of the computer control In the Auto position it will run if the Control Program requests coolant Accessory Socket The Accessory socket is for connection of accessories such as a touch probe Figure 5 2 Holders in the TTS range with collet Using Tormach PCNC 1100 5 2 30625 Rev C3 1 5 1 2 1 5 1 2 2 Machine controls Tool Changing Tooling Strategy The PCNC uses a R8 spindle and so you have access to a vast range of standard tooling The main options open to you are e Tormach Tooling System TTS this allows you to have all the tools that you commonly use mounted in low cost tool holders and to change them very quickly The working length of each tool is accurately maintained each time it is loaded into the spindle so it can be used for cutting with no further setup Tool lengths can be setup and checked in a stores or inspection area without using the PCNC figures 5 2 amp 5 3 e R8 tool holders offer similar features to TTS holders but need to be setup once in the machine and are slower to exchange
187. ith that letter If a parameter setting of the same parameter is repeated on a line 3 15 3 6 for example only the last setting will take effect It is silly but not illegal to set the same parameter twice on the same line If more than one comment appears on a line only the last one will be used each of the other comments will be read and its format will be checked but it will be ignored thereafter It is expected that putting more than one comment on a line will be very rare 7 5 7 Item Order The three types of item whose order may vary on a line as given at the beginning of this section are word parameter setting and comment Imagine that these three types of item are divided into three groups by type The first group the words may be reordered in any way without changing the meaning of the line If the second group the parameter settings is reordered there will be no change in the meaning of the line unless the same parameter is set more than once In this case only the last setting of the parameter will take effect For example after the line 3 15 3 6 has been interpreted the value of parameter 3 will be 6 If the order is reversed to 3 6 3 15 and the line is interpreted the value of parameter 3 will be 15 If the third group the comments contains more than one comment and is reordered only the last comment will be used If each group is kept in order or reordered without changing the meaning of the line th
188. iting angle is set by a DRO This setting will probably need to be chosen experimentally depending on the characteristics of the machine tool and perhaps the toolpath of an individual job Interpreter Interaction with Controls Feed and Speed Override controls The CS has commands which enable M48 or disable M49 the feed and speed override switches It is useful to be able to override these switches for some machining operations The idea is that optimal settings have been included in the program and the operator should not change them Block Delete Control If the block delete control is ON lines of code which start with a slash the block delete character are not executed If the switch is off such lines are executed Optional Program Stop Control The optional program stop control see Configure gt Logic works as follows If this control is ON and an input line contains an M1 code program execution is stopped at the end on the commands on that line until the Cycle Start button is pushed Tool File The CS maintains a tool file for each of the 256 tools which can be used Each data line of the file contains the data for one tool This allows the definition of the tool length Z axis tool diameter for milling and tool tip radius for turning Part programs Language Overview The language is based on lines of code Each line also called a block may include commands to the machining system to do several differe
189. k on the unusual modes LED you can define the current state as usual Rotational Diameter Control Family As described in the Feed Rate control family it is possible to define the approximate size of a rotated work piece so the rotational axis speed can be correctly included in the blended feed rate The relevant diameters are entered in the DRO on this family figure 5 24 The Axis control Family has a warning LED to indicate the setting of a non zero value here Note A value is not required if rotary movement is not to be coordinated with linear axes In this case a suitable F word for degrees per minute or degrees per rev should be programmed Toolchange Position Control Family This family defines the place the machine should go to when a request to change a tool occurs or when the Goto Toolchange button is clicked A part program can go to it by using the M998 code figure 5 25 The position is defined in oe machine coordinates i e Define Toolchange position units mm inch dl relative to the home Toggle T C Units Currently set for inches switches and in the default machine units Tool Change Location G28 Home Absolute coordinates fram y Enter the special value Hoea EES coordinates 9999 if you do not want a pe A A given axis to move when a X 9999 000 0 000 oot eange is reques Y 9999 0000 _ 0 0000 e units in which you e eee define your toolchange 3 0000 QO 0000 position can be configured
190. lding the tooling in one hand fully unscrew the drawbar and remove the tooling To insert a new tool e Check that the R8 taper on the tool holder collet is quite clean e Insert the tool holder collet into the spindle turning it to ensure that the drive keyway engages with the key in the spindle Start the drawbar thread to retain the tool holder collet e If you are using a tool holder then the drawbar can be tightened Otherwise using the drawbar to prevent the collet jaws from closing in the spindle taper insert the TTS holder or tool into the collet Then tighten the drawbar ir oF e Finally disengage the locking forks and close the door Figure 5 7 Spindle lock fork engaged 5 1 2 3 Changing TTS Tools Full details of the TTS system are given in its documentation You should consult the TTS documentation for more information especially if you are going to make very heavy cuts The system uses a precision 34 R8 collet in the spindle Insert this as described above for R8 tooling Tool holders can be changed by loosening the drawbar by just one turn and using the copper faced hammer on the squared end to disengage the collet taper You do not need to remove the collet Note You can change the tools in TTS drill chucks or the ER collet adaptor while these are fitted to the PCNC spindle although doing this will not exploit the pre settable nature of the tools You should use both spanners on the ER ch
191. lear flats Deviation Outer 0 2 Tools Inner 0 i Ad Figure 4 16 The machined test piece Virtually any other commercially available CAD CAM systems can be used with the PCNC control software because of its compliance with industry standards CAD CAM software is configured to generate appropriate code for a particular machine tool by a post processor You should consult Tormach for advice on the best post processor option to purchase with your preferred software Using Tormach PCNC 1100 4 8 30625 Rev C3 1 4 4 4 4 1 4 4 1 1 4 4 1 2 From an idea to a part Programming with Wizards There will be situations when a simple piece of one off machining has to be performed and you do not have suitable CAD CAM software or perhaps the machine user is unfamiliar with the software that is available The j Wizard facility built into the Control Software is an ideal solution Machining Wizard Concept A Wizard is a special screen that is displayed on demand by the Control Software It has a series of DROs with which you define the cuts that need to be made Figure 4 17 shows the general appearance of a surfacing Wizard Final Cut Daph Finish Feed Tool Offset Y Ez o l Core anne Clamp Ces File Rewound Figure 4 17 General view of a typical Wizard screen Selecting and Running a Wizard The Wizards gt Pick Wizard menu displays a list of Wizards which are installed on your
192. leeve left side and the shoulder cut into the ball screw shaft The sleeve is held against the left inner bearing race by the locknuts as the locknuts are screwed toward the bearing pair the preload increases Figure 9 4 shows how the force of preload is transmitted through the bearings from the inner race to the outer race In a preload pair this force is then transmitted back to the inner race by an opposed bearing It should be apparent that the correct orientation of the angular contact bearing is critical to the operation Figure 9 4 Angular contact bearing 30635 Rev C3 1 9 7 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 Appendices 9 5 5 2 Making the Adjustment In order to make the adjustment you will need two hook spanner wrenches PN 30485 in order to rotate the two nuts on the ballscrew end figure 9 5 The nut nearer the bearing housing is the adjustment nut and the one nearer the stepper motor is the lock nut When working on the Z axis you should remove any tooling from the spindle and support the head by resting the spindle nose on a block of lumber supported on a small jack Loosen the lock nut and back it off about two turns Hold the ballscrew to prevent it from rotating and Figure 9 5 Spanner wrenches tighten the adjustment nut until there is slightly more backlash than you ultimately want to achieve tightening the lock nut will slightly increase the bearing preload There are two possible methods to judge
193. ll nuts and bearings Preloading of bearings and ballscrews can remove the physical open space between moving parts but the technique cannot eliminate compressibility The key to achieving maximum accuracy 1s understanding and controlling the magnitude and direction of forces Maximum accuracy is achieved when the forces are minimized as occurs in a finishing cut Maximum repeatability is achieved when the forces are repeatable both in magnitude and direction 1 3 3 Resolution Accuracy and Repeatability of the PCNC The minimum discrete position move is 0 0001 this is the resolution of motion Machine accuracy is closely related to ballscrew accuracy Our ballscrews are accurate to 0 0006 per foot but considering all the other factors that come into play we prefer to keep accuracy expectations to 0 0013 per foot Repeatability will be better than 0 001 per foot Machining is a mix of science skill and art The caveat in stating accuracy and repeatability is that these factors depend on the techniques used by the machinist A skilled machinist can often deliver accuracy that exceeds the accuracy specified by the machine builder while an inexperienced machinist may have difficulty delivering the expected accuracy With this understanding we cannot tell you what accuracy you will be able to achieve in your own work Nevertheless the accuracy specified by a machine builder remains an important reference point 1 4 Scope and Intellectual Pr
194. load many drivers The Standard PC drivers for the video hard disk keyboard and other devices are all different than the ACPI drivers This can take a long time and it may appear to have frozen for many minutes during the process It may require re booting several times Using Tormach PCNC 1100 26 30625 Rev C3 1 Appendices 10 4 Revision history Rev C3 1 6 January 2008 Clarification of tapping operations Simplification of computer optimisation process Addition of new electrical component part numbers Rev C2 3 19 August 2007 Clarification of cutting FirstPart Additional details of limit switches in exploded views and power to coolant pump and computer Rev C2 2 7 August 2007 Stepper Driver switch setting details on schematic diagram The probe and tool setter screens added Addition of information on Tapping and support macros Addition of G68 G69 Tool offsets revised to describe Master Tool as longest tool procedure Rev gt 4 4 May 2007 Update to some illustrations and the consistency of paragraph labeling Rev So 3 2 May 2007 Stylistic standards tightened detailed drafting improved Rev C1 2 1 1 May 2007 2007 More consistent More consistent naming of accessories used of accessories used Rev C1 1 18 oe 2007 aa e draft of Mach3 version 30635 Rev C3 1 27 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 Appendices 11 Index Hint Where there is a choice most index entries are made using the name of a thing e g tool offset
195. locity mode sharp corners of the path may be rounded slightly so that the feed rate may be kept up These modes are to allow the user to control the compromise involved in turning corners because a real machine has a finite acceleration due to the inertia of its mechanism Exact stop does what it says The machine will come to rest at each change of direction and the tool will therefore precisely follow the commanded path 30635 Rev C3 1 7 3 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 7 2 7 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 7 3 7 4 7 4 1 Programming language reference Constant velocity will overlap acceleration in the new direction with deceleration in the current one in order to keep the commanded feed rate This implies a rounding of any corner but faster and smoother cutting This is particularly important in routing and plasma cutting The lower the acceleration of the machine axes the greater will be the radius of the rounded corner In Plasma mode set on Configure Logic dialog the system attempts to optimize corner motion for plasma cutting by a proprietary algorithm It is also possible to define a limiting angle so that changes in direction of more than this angle will always be treated as Exact Stop even though Constant Velocity is selected This allows gentle corners to be smoother but avoids excessive rounding of sharp corners even on machines with low acceleration on one or more axes This feature is enabled in the Configure Logic dialog and the lim
196. lows the toolpath display to be automatically scrolled as the controlled point is jogged File Control Family These controls are involved with the file of your part program Most should be self evident in operation Opens Recent ReLoad Close Figure 5 17 File control family Change G Code Change G code allows you to use a variety of tools to edit the part program you have loaded When clicked it displays a dialog allowing you to choose the program to update the G code figure 5 17 Clicking a button will run the Zero aS named CAM program or editor Corection radius and load the file corresponding to the G code into it figure 5 18 You must of course specify the Set Next Line Run Notepad program that created the G code in Line Run SprutCAM the first place For example Run From Here Run Tubocapcam running SprutCAM with code oo produced by SheetCAM will give a Goto Tool Change ut S file not found error and an work Offset G54 untitled CAM job Sus a When you have recreated the G Figure 5 18 Redirector to edit G code code in the CAM software and exited or exited from the editor then the new file will automatically be loaded into the control Edit Save table How l Edit Save table How l Program coord lt Work Offset gt G52 G92 Offset lt Tool 2 gt Machine coord Vise Offset On Off E Two flute ballnose X coord 4 5000 0 0000 0 0
197. ly in a straight line in other direction e g to make a spiral All the moves take place from the current position of the tool GOO and GO1 need the coordinates of the ending position e g G01 X3 2 Y2 1 Z 0 3 would move the three linear axes together so the tool will follow a straight line ending at X 3 2 Y 2 1 and Z 0 3 G02 and G03 clockwise and counterclockwise arcs respectively need additional information to define the center point to be used Most G codes are what is termed Modal This means they stay in effect until another one is used So if GOI has been used on one line of code then the following lines only need to give the position of the end of the move As an example the following code will move the tool to a start position X 1 Y 2 and then move it in a square of side 3 1 GUC AL 1240 GOA X4 1 Ioel X1 Y2 In practice however the simplicity of G codes is deceptive Calculating the position of the center of the tool by hand is tedious and error prone If you wanted to cut around the outside of a block of material to make the 3 1 square then you need to allow for the diameter of the tool and need to move the Z axis to take acceptable sized cuts in each of several passes You will easily be able to learn what a part program is intended to do but it is unusual to write one by hand as there is a wide range of software tools that can help you figure 4 1 Choosing the Appropriate Design Software A
198. machine above some scrap stock and use a tape measure to reconcile the DRO readings with the machine position relative to the switches and the stock When you have a clear picture in your mind of what is happening you have mastered the idea of offsets and should have no problems with this chapter Measuring Techniques Now it is time to go from the theory of coordinate systems to the very practical choice of the best ways of finding where a tool is in relation to stock which you want to machine We will concentrate for the present on the position of the Z axis There are several reasons for this e The Z dimension is often the one with the highest accuracy constraints because the stock is often oversize in both dimensions in X and Y and is at any event not easy to locate precisely on the table e The Z direction is not only important for setting the initial position of the stock it needs to be accounted for when using several tools which are almost inevitably of different lengths Roll Your Own Gauge Method This is a time honored machinists method which traditionally used Rizla or similar cigarette paper as a gauge The plastic foil Figure 6 3 Roll your own gauge in use Using Tormach PCNC 1100 6 2 30625 Rev C3 1 Offsets from candy wrapping is a good substitute Both materials are fairly strong and around 0 002 in thickness Jog the tool very carefully down to the stock with a piece of paper foil on it
199. mand is encountered It will then wait for Cycle Start to be pressed execute the macro M6End and continue running the part program You can provide Visual Basic code in the macros to operate your own mechanical tool changer and to move the axes to a convenient location for tool changing if you wish You are strongly advised to put the T the M06 and the G43 H on one line block of code See G43 for more details Coolant Control M7 M8 and M9 To turn mist coolant on program M7 To turn flood coolant on program M8 To turn all coolant off program M9 It is always OK to use any of these commands regardless of what coolant is on or off Re run from First Line M47 On encountering an M47 the part program will continue running from its first line It is an error if M47 is executed in a subroutine The run can be stopped by the Pause or Stop buttons See also the use of M99 outside a subroutine to achieve the same effect Override Control M48 and M49 To enable the speed and feed override program M48 To disable both overrides program M4 9 It is OK to enable or disable the switches when they are already enabled or disabled Call Subroutine M98 To call a subroutine program M98 P L orM98 P Q The program must contain an O line with the number given by the P word of the Call This O line is a sort of label which indicates the start of the subroutine The O line may not have a line number N word on it
200. moves the controlled point which should be at the end of the probe tip in a straight line at the current feed rate toward the programmed point if the probe trips the probe decelerates After successful probing parameters 2000 to 2005 will be set to the coordinates of the location of the controlled point at the time the probe tripped not where it stopped or if it does not trip to the coordinates at the end of the move and a triplet giving X Y and Z at the trip will be written to the triplet file if it has been opened by the M40 macro OpenDigFile function q v Code in macros can determine if a point is a trip or just end of the move by inspecting if the DIGITIZE input is active after the G31 command 30635 Rev C3 1 7 17 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 7 7 12 2 7 7 12 3 Programming language reference Using the Straight Probe Command Using the straight probe command if the probe shank is kept nominally parallel to the Z axis 1 e any rotational axes are at zero and the tool length offset for the probe is used so that the controlled point is at the end of the tip of the probe e Without additional knowledge about the probe the parallelism of a face of a part to the X Y plane may for example be found e Ifthe probe tip radius is known approximately the parallelism of a face of a part to the YZ or XZ plane may for example be found e If the shank of the probe is known to be well aligned with the Z axis and the probe tip radi
201. mp y 3 yv SUS PB Y E Ag 4j O y 7 7 A _ SADA b 4 2 N O a aN M b z o y O sO MO M o EN Oo x NOO f aao ii d al ol ajel ol al 25 Rio n s on N OTEn gt ste e NI AN N oor Owort anza 58 57 56 56 N 55 54 xs 53 ef UA 55 54 42 44 43 24 15 10 Number Description ID Number Description X ads sor bets 3 5 3 6 7 8 8 7 7 2 3 4 7 3040 Y axis cover mounting plate 30407 Y axis front way cover 3057 Y axis front way cover ref note 7 3040 Screw M6x16 1 30409 Oil pump LK 8TL 30410 Block 5 1 0 1 2 3 3 4 5 Bumper AAA AAA AA AAA Annular Bearing Engineering Council identification ABEC7202AC P5 The Y axis covers were changed after machine serial number 149 but dimensions should be checked as many machine owners installed a conversion kit Earlier covers were 280mm 1 1 wide later covers were 320mm 12 6 wide Later covers were also better enforced and a more durable material Early front and rear covers were 30407 and 30447 Later covers were 30578 for both front and rear Conversion kit is PN 30580 54 55 53 91 39 40 41 22 23 21 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 24 51 52 17 37 38 KA OX VA Y A elo y O J JN Ke O Ny D YA y SS gt wa oA 0 AS D ES ay y e9 I 13 8 IMD gt 0 py L Loa ate AN XS Y
202. n is a generalization of the vise jaw locator on the simple screen It can set the origin to any corner of an object in any orientation Setting Rotation from Points This function is used to set up the machine to mill components where the X Y axis of the part is not square to the X Y axis of the machine This might be because the part does not have any square faces accessible when it is mounted for a second operation The function uses the G68 code to rotate the working coordinate system relative to the machine coordinate system You should be sure you understand the working of G68 by running test pieces before you use it on a job Point 1 defines the center of rotation in the existing work coordinates It is often convenient to keep this as 0 0 or for it to be the same as one of the other points Points 2 and 3 define a line whose ii Py angle is the direction of the new coordinate system Figure 8 19 Probing Point 2 Cable right If no flat face 1s accessible 1t will often be useful to have Points 2 and 3 as the centers of holes already drilled or bored in the part Using Tormach PCNC 1100 8 10 30625 Rev C3 1 8 2 2 4 Machine upgrades and configuration Click the button Axes to set the G68 command The angle of rotation used is displayed in the DRO and if it is non zero the LED on this screen and next to all axis DROs will indicate that G68 is active The X and Y DROs will be red to remind you the rotation is active Rotation
203. n place of lt description of number gt NO40 Delete lines NO20 NO30 and NO40 when you do that NO50 GO Z lt Z value of retracted position gt F lt feed rate gt NO60 1001 lt nominal X value of hole center gt NO70 1002 lt nominal Y value of hole center gt NO80 1003 lt some Z value inside the hole gt NO90 1004 lt probe tip radius gt N100 1005 lt nominal hole diameter gt 2 0 1004 N110 GO X 1001 Y 1002 move above nominal hole center N120 GO Z 1003 move into hole to be cautious substitute Gl for GO here NI30 Gal XT l00L 10057 probe x side of hole N140 1011 2000 save results NI50 GO X 1001 Y l002 back to center of hole N160 G31 X 1001 1005 probe X side of hole N170 1021 1011 2000 2 0 find pretty good X value of hole center NITSO G0 X I1021 Y11002 pack to conter of hole N190 G3L Y 1002 1005 probe Y side of hole N200 1012 2001 save results N210 GO X 1021 Y 1002 back to center of hole N220 G31 Y 1002 1005 probe Y side of hole N230 1022 1012 2001 2 0 find very good Y value of hole center N2400 4 Lois a LO A20O0L 2 100411 tind hole diameter an Y direction Using Tormach PCNC 1100 7 18 30625 Rev C3 1 Programming language reference N250 GO X LO2L Y 1027 back to center of hole N260 G31 X 1021 1005 probe X side of hole N270 1031 2000 save results N280 GO X LO2L Y 1022 back to center of hole
204. n pour computer Use the Device Manager to change the properties of any device Device Manager Driver Signing lets you make sure that installed drivers are compatible with Windows Windows Update lets you set up how Windows connects to Windows Update for drivers Driver Signing windows Update fil Hardware Profiles a Hardware profiles provide a way for vou to set up and store j eal different hardware configurations XE Hardware Profiles OF Appl a ance Apply Action Help 0502 13 wa E Mice and other pointing devices El E Monitors Ee Network adapters gt NVIDIA Network Bus Enumerator EA Ports COM amp LPT Views ae x GM1 o plantea E er EEC Printer Port LPT1 Processor ca F lt SCSI and RAID controllers ite Ex ACS E o PL 2 Sounds and Audio Devices Change silin ISE 9 i Speech Change ES eg LiveUpdate This ap D e k band Start Menu Custon fo a User Accounts Change NETA ShartSmart H Windows Firewall Z Figure 9 13 Finding printer port T EEN EIA O EE Re EEE iol xi l EN a RS ECP Printer Port LPT1 Properties File e amp 2 x General Part Settings Driver Detai Y ECP Printer Port LPT1 Action View Help JAP ATHLON64 4 Computer S Disk drives E E E Display adapters Resource settings f DYD CD ROM drives Resource typ
205. n provided does not supply all the information you need we can provide additional information and engineering support required for your project on a consulting engineering basis We are actually very good at this If you have your questions well organized we can normally provide all the information you need in short order Consulting engineering is done by electrical and mechanical engineers and billed at current hourly rates As you might expect all warranties for Tormach equipment are voided through modification to the equipment or use outside of the Intended Use Individuals or companies involved with modifying the equipment or applying the products assume all consequent liability Using Tormach PCNC 1100 9 2 30625 Rev C3 1 Machine upgrades and configuration 9 4 Specifications 9 4 1 Mechanical Table Size 34 x 9 5 Table Slots 3 T Slots 5 8 2 Drainage Alignment slots Travel X Y Z axis 18 x 9 5 x 16 5 Spindle Nose Diameter 3 Spindle Taper R8 with spindle lock for easy single hand drawbar operation Spindle Speed Range RPM 300 4500 Computer controlled spindle speed and direction with DC injection braking from a 1 5 hp induction motor 2 hp peak Cartridge style spindle with V belt transmission There are two overlapping speed ranges Low belt speed is 300 1750 RPM high belt is 800 4500 RPM Spindle Center to Column Face 11 Maximum Weight of Workpiece 500 Ibs Max spin
206. n the Control Program you will be asked if you want to save it Unless you have made a serious error in setting up tool offsets you should save them or you will have to enter them again next time you run the Control Program Using the T DRO on a screen is a very easy way of changing a tool The process is more complex in a part program This is because the RS 274 standard part programs can run on large CNC systems with complex automatic tool changers The RS 274 process consists of choosing the next tool to use with a T word Loading the tool with M06 and applying its offsets with G43 The required commands will be generated by CAD CAM systems and the Wizards We strongly advise you to put all three stages T M06 and G43 H on one line in you program and to check that the post processor of your CAM system does this If you do not follow this Triplet Rule then you will encounter problems if you mix using tool lengths in the tool table and just setting the work offset when you change a tool 30635 Rev C3 1 6 11 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 6 5 6 5 1 6 5 2 6 6 6 6 1 6 6 2 Multiple Work Origins G54 Work Offset The previous explanations of offsets have only referred to a single set X Y Z A of work offsets These are always in effect when the Control Software is loaded It is sometimes useful to have another set of offsets and for them to be persistent when the system is closed down and reloaded Suppose you have a machine vice
207. n the lower pair of pulleys Retighten the belt so there is between and 14 movement between the pulleys lock the motor mounting and stow the handles in the vertical position Computer Control of the Spindle and Coolant Switch the Spindle and Coolant to Auto on the control Tucan 1750 RPM panel Make sure the computer is displaying the Simple Run screen as shown in figure 2 14 The portion shown in figure S 2 17 shows the controls for the spindle Use the mouse to click the Hi Lo button You will see that the screen LEDs depicting the pulleys will change and the sheds 7 E appropriate maximum speed will be displayed below them Choose the Low setting to correspond to the PCNC pulleys Zof _ 1 0000 mn n 75nM Figure 2 17 Spindle controls Rougher Note Just after starting the system the screen LEDs may not correspond to the indicated maximum speed The speed value is always correct and a click on the Hi Lo button will bring the LEDs into step Next to the label S is a digital read out DRO of the requested spindle speed You can change this by clicking the mouse on it It will become highlighted Type a number say 500 for 500 rpm and press Enter Figure 2 18 shows the screen just z HGH E EMS before pressing Enter If you make a mistake you can press HiiLow ow iow m Esc to return to the original value S Speed _ 1750 RPM This technique is used for setting any DRO Remember to use Enter after any DRO chang
208. n the tool will move in the positive X direction 1 e to the right of the work Similarly the Up arrow moves the tool in the positive Y direction 1 e towards the PCNC column Of course this actually happens on the PCNC by the table moving under the tool but you must imagine what it would look like if you were sitting on the table and watching the tool You should jog around until you are quite confident which way the machine moves when you press any key Notice that the values in the Axis DROs change as you jog the tool around Jogging the Z axis is done by using the Page up and Page down keys Here of course it is the tool that moves so Up is indeed up Summary This chapter has covered a lot of basic ground Much of it only has to be done once You may however wish to revisit the latter parts if you are not fully confident with using buttons DROs the MDI and jogging We will give less detail on using these e g assume you know about shortcuts and when to use Enter in subsequent chapters Using Tormach PCNC 1100 2 16 30625 Rev C3 1 3 3 1 Making your first part Making Your First Part This chapter shows you how to make your first part with the PCNC It assumes that you have no prior experience with running a part program on a Computer Numerically Controlled machine tool Even if you have previous experience you will find that following this tutorial gives you an introduction to the controls of the mach
209. nd whose radius is the radius of the tool The destination point of the tool tip is then found as the center of a circle of the same radius tangent to the tangent line at the destination point figure 6 24 If the programmed point is inside the initial cross section of the tool the circle on the left an error 1s signaled If the first move after cutter radius compensation has ad been turned on is an arc the programmed center point arc which is enerated is destination point of tool tip 8 efi programmed end porini derived from an auxiliary arc o a i CLP pero which has its center at the T o second construet this are progr ammed center point which is the path taken passes through the A First construct this auxiliary arc programmed end point and is tangent to the cutter at its current location If the Figure 6 25 First cutter compensation move Arc auxiliary arc cannot be constructed an error is signaled The generated arc moves the tool so that it stays tangent to the auxiliary arc throughout the move figure 6 25 Regardless of whether the first move is a straight line or an arc the Z axis may also move at the same time It will move linearly as it does when cutter radius compensation is not being used Rotary axis motions A B and C axes are allowed with cutter radius compensation but using them would be very unusual After the entry moves of cutter radius compensation the interpreter keeps the to
210. ne te etre cease 7 5 TID e AAA saan a eee sane tecaeneksae ene ctauanatiencons eee yaaneseeacomecess 7 6 O OU E espns o e O 7 7 e Nc 7 7 Pe Pa O O A tea fas at alls Pet Mee earn 7 7 7 5 3 3 Expressions and Binary Operations eses date leads 7 7 Too Unay Operaon Vales 7 8 HE Parameter SC NO etcetera E te test deat 7 8 deo Comments and NICSSA CCS daria saatedemnbusner susbedenandiuses suotedtinrtess 7 8 Dee A A 7 9 Ror UTD eana e e a Aetna ates a tn ts 7 9 Toe Commands and Machine Modest iaa tddi 7 9 7 6 M da Groups IE I IEA ba RIIIE A 7 10 7 7 A deuduesdestetseddcssewauedsdivedicadesadecusadestwudedsdests 7 11 7 7 1 Rapid Linear Motion GO0 ccc cecccceccccseeeccneeeseeeeceneeceeneeeseeeeseeeeseseeeeneessneeseneeesenes 7 11 TA2 Linear Motion at Feed Rate GOl enari did 7 13 LI gt Are atiPecd Rate G02 and GUS ii 7 13 LIL ARAdiUS Formal AT aa o in da dos lod da de 7 13 Taoa Comte Omar da 7 14 Tdo A A A Fat eneret rer eerie ert rere rater e 7 15 7 7 5 Coordinate System Data Tool and Work Offset Tables G10 oonccconcnnccoccnnnnccnonccnnnnnoss 7 15 7 7 6 Clockwise Counterclockwise Circular Pocket G12 and GlB oonccnocnncnccnnnncnncnccnnnnnoss 7 16 Labor Aexatand Enter Polar Modelado ida 7 16 7 7 8 Plane Selection G17 G18 and GlO ooococcncnccccncnccccnoncnnononccnnnonconononcnnononccnnncnccnnncnicnonens 7 16 E Meer EI sheer E sauimeemedssaoentaatecontas 7 17 La Retin to Home G28 ANC GU d
211. nnection point S1 is the same as wire number J1 2 Connection point S2 is the same as wire number J1 1 The black probe goes on Sl and the red probe goes on S2 Press the Spindle Start button on your machine Record the voltage it should be near 5V This is your Volts on MANUAL measurement 5 Now return to the operator panel on the cabinet door Switch the spindle mode to Auto On the PCNC control software switch the belt speed position to HIGH l H CAUTION Do not run this utility when machine Control Software is running and set the Sp eed DRO to 4200 RPM or you will lose your changes when you close the Control Software A Turn on the spindle by clicking on the Pinter Pot reee screen button marked SPINDLE In step 3 li SA mr uo Look in o PCNC3 you were creating the maximum spindle 2 speed command from the operator Spindle Cali console Here you are creating the Spindle ste Papell maximum spindle speed command from a the computer The actual spindle should Rie Volts on not be turning because you should still have the spindle key lockout in the off position from step 2 Again record the voltage this is your Volts on AUTO eae Sr measurement Close the PCNC control My Computer software program Mill Tormachx 6 Open the XML Tweak software program My Network e PCNCM3xml located under Programs on your Start co e type Profes menu Click the Open Profile
212. nning a job with the screen unattended 1 Right Click My Computer and select Properties 2 Click Automatic Updates tab 3 Uncheck Keep my computer updated 4 Click OK 10 3 4 Set Computer to Standard PC not ACPI PC Background This optimization procedure is not needed on most computers but it is required on some We recommend this procedure only be applied last and only if necessary Advanced Configuration and Power Interface is a power management specification that allows the operating system to control the how power is applied to the computer s devices For example an ACPI PC can be turned off completely by using Windows Shutdown function With a Standard PC not ACPI the Windows Shutdown function will close programs and prepare the operating system then open a window with the statement You can now turn off your computer A Standard PC can only be turned off at the power switch on the box itself not through the operating system Right Click My Computer and select Properties Click Hardware tab Click Device Manager button in the middle Double click Computer Right click on Standard ACPI PC and choose Update Driver Choose Install the software from a Specific Location Advanced Click Next Choose Do not search I will choose driver to install Click Next 10 Choose Standard PC from the listing 11 Click Next 12 Click OK O ON WB a A 0 N e When you re boot Windows will have to find and
213. nt things Lines of code may be collected in a file to make a program A typical line of code consists of an optional line number at the beginning followed by one or more words A word consists of a letter followed by a number or something that evaluates to a number A word may either give a command or provide an argument to a command For example G1 X3 is a valid line of code with two words G1 is a command meaning move in a straight line at the programmed feed rate and X3 provides an argument value the value of X should be 3 at the end of the move Most commands start with either G General or M Miscellaneous The words for these commands are called G codes and M codes Using Tormach PCNC 1100 7 4 30625 Rev C3 1 Programming language reference The language has two commands M2 or M30 either of which ends a program A program may end before the end of a file Lines of a file that occur after the end of a program are not to be executed in the normal flow so will generally be parts of subroutines 7 4 2 Parameters The CS maintains an array of 10 320 numerical parameters Many of them have specific uses The parameters that are associated with fixtures are persistent over time Other parameters will be undefined when The CS is loaded The parameters are preserved when the interpreter 1s reset Parameters 1 to 1000 can be used by the code of part programs 7 4 3 Coordinate Systems The machining sys
214. ntrol oooonccnoccnnnocnnoncnnnnno 5 11 Goto toolchanNge occccooccccncnncnoccnoncnnononononccnnnoss 5 11 H Home return to G28 G30 occooccccnnccnonocnnonccnnnns 7 17 j VI Modes Seto ctas snes nata oca 5 16 IJ mode Absolute oocoooccnccoccncnccncnnccnonocnnononos 7 14 IJ mode Incremenkts oocccoocncnoccncnncnnnnonnnnnooos 7 14 Inch units GZ OME GCC A Otc Sastre A aa e 7 17 Incremental distance mode A O wert A 7 26 Incremental IJ mode oocccoocccnoccncnncnnononnnnnonos 7 14 Inhibits and overrides control family 5 15 Installation EIOS Alle and E 2 10 OL COMUPOM SOL Ware idas 2 9 of driver A dude Ne 2 11 Intellectual property statement cccceeeeeee es 1 4 Intelligent labels GES CIID A O enema smeamaae 5 6 Intended use policy if use is Out Of SCOPE ccooccccnoccnoncnnnonooos 9 1 Statement OL srl delas 9 1 BOO e See Main switch J Jerky motion with short lines Constant velofity mode to avold ooo o 7 3 Jog Shuttle controller oooocccooccnnnccnnonccnnos 5 8 Jogging CMCC ML O A EEA 2 16 TATI A be csnte E E 2 15 JOS SING pendant reriptan a 5 16 L Laser tinder MeNodS rusa 6 6 Learning and TTalDIOg oooccconcnncncnnnoncnnononnnoncnnnns 2 3 License statementesincsisidiiici alii la didsa 1 4 LAUNO O SaN eas 2 5 Lighting for Machine occoooccnnncnncnccnnoncnnononinoncnnnns 2 2 Line OMA of code ara ori 7 5 Line D
215. ntroller for jogging the probe position because it 7 z 3 combines precision with speed If you hit anything x while jogging the machine does not stop and although the devices have some over travel there is a risk of damage Probing a Z Surface If the Control Software knows the length of the probe relative to the master tool then you can set the current work offset so any surface you probe is Z 0 0 conversely if you have a Z 0 0 surface then you can set the length of the probe in the tool table The pane that does this is shown in figure 8 14 We describe setting the tool length first although it A needs to be done very infrequently e g if the probe Figure 8 14 Probing Z tip is changed or the master tool length has to be altered The yellow button 1s semi transparent to reflect the infrequent use and visually draw you to the Set Work Offset button e Put the master tool in the spindle and type its number traditionally tool 0 or 1 into the T DRO Jog Z so it just touches the table or any flat Z surface Zero the Z axis DRO You can use this or any of the standard setup processes for the Z work offset for details revise offsets and in particular sections 6 1 and 6 3 e Load the probe into the spindle e Click the button Move and Set Tool length so the probe trips on the same surface you used to touch the master tool This will set the length of Tool 99 the probe relative to the master tool In ever
216. o 2 4 Z LAS adus nei aer cons ae ties E acacia 9 4 Using Tormach PCNC 1100
217. o loose or rapid wear and excessive friction too tight Figure 9 1 shows the X axis bearings ballscrew and motor The Y axis and Z axis are similar Using Tormach PCNC 1100 9 6 30625 Rev C3 1 9 5 5 1 Machine upgrades and configuration The recommended procedure for checking backlash is to observe motion at the table or head via a dial indicator while moving the machine using the axis motors Tormach recommends adjusting the backlash on X and Y to something between 0 0004 and 0 0008 The recommended backlash for Z axis is 0 0006 to 0 001 Checking backlash by pushing or pulling on the axis is a less accurate method The push pull method will normally show a smaller backlash value You can fool yourself into thinking there is zero backlash when the effective lost motion is within specification Figure 9 2 Photograph of X axis mount Understanding Preloaded Angular Contact Bearings Figure 9 3 shows a cross section of a typical ball screw shaft mount The ball screw shaft is in the center and the crosshatched section is the iron casting that mounts the bearings There are two angular contact ball bearings forming a preloaded pair The cover plate holds the two outer Spacer Bearing Outer Race Cover Plate Lock Nut E 1 A ES JING Y N Figure 9 3 Detail of bearing system races together along with the spacer that is between them The inner races are held between the s
218. ocations Power required is 220 to 230 VAC 50 or 60 Hz Continuous current is below 15 amps but a 20 amp breaker or slow blow fuse is recommended Both primary and secondary power inputs must be grounded During installation it is not enough to assume that the ground line of a wall outlet is properly grounded Check continuity between the machine frame and true earth ground water pipe or similar to ensure a good ground connection Location and Mounting People experienced with CNC machining will undoubtedly have ideas as to how they want to setup their PCNC 1100 figure 2 1 While the machine can be configured in many different ways there are a few limitations Many fully enclosed vertical machining centers incorporate high volume coolant systems that make the inside of the machine look like the inside of a dishwasher The PCNC electrical cabinet and operator console _ should not be exposed to such conditions Additionally there should never be an enclosure or accessory that limits access to the emergency stop Please keep these limitations in mind when you plan your configuration If your prior experience is limited to manual mills then keep in mind that as CNC dramatically extends your machining capabilities it will also change the way you cut metal When your metal cutting is done by turning handles on a manual mill your operations will generally be limited to cleaning up a surface drilling a hole pattern or cutting to
219. ode generation described above indeed the illustrations are screenshots of TurboCADCAM It is a very good value for the cost and Tormach can supply a version specially customized for the PCNC The illustrations of machining FirstPart show it in use If your work needs more powerful parametric solid Elo p Yem prot Sach JO Setch Postre Tach Tommie Window bp sl modeling and 3D milling ESOO s o gt Ri cemalsorieNe 09000005 from these models then the R i matched combination of i Alibre Design and z SprutCAM is available f 5 from Tormach Figures gt 4 14 through 4 16 illustrate Ol iq a part being designed in 19 Alibre the manufacture i being defined in la SprutCAM and a finished test piece g ap a Figure 4 14 Modelling a 3D part 30635 Rev C3 1 4 7 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 From an Idea to a part File Edit View Options Tools Help t Rot xis S0 Machining ha 37 De Be 21902 11 1232 GE Si SprutCAM 4 0 D RaidJunk SWParts 4th Ki Dynamic Machining gt New y Parameters y Run _ Reset Name i 2 Job list B M 2 AwTop a M 4E RweBattom ER 4E RW Front 3 E M 4E AwBack Eu ii V Machine Tool Feedrate Toolpath Parameters Strategy WV Workpie Restricti w 2 C Scallop Y Holes E ee Step byZ Distance O Z D of tool Quantity El C C
220. of an integer Parameter Value A parameter value is the hash character followed by a real value The real value must evaluate to an integer between 1 and 10320 The integer is the parameter identification number Think of it as the number of a pigeon hole and distinguish this from its real value which is whatever number is stored in it The character takes precedence over other operations so that for example 1 2 means the number found by adding 2 to the value of parameter 1 not the value found in parameter 3 Of course 1 2 does mean the value found in parameter 3 The character may be repeated for example 2 means the value of the parameter whose index is the integer value of parameter 2 Expressions and Binary Operations An expression is a set of characters starting with a left bracket and ending with a balancing right bracket In between the brackets are numbers parameter values mathematical operations and other expressions An expression may be evaluated to produce a number The expressions on a line are evaluated when the line is read before anything on the line is executed An example of an expression is tacos WO poe A072 1 i 30635 Rev C3 1 7 7 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 7 5 3 4 1 9 4 1 5 9 Programming language reference Binary operations appear only inside expressions Nine binary operations are defined There are four basic mathematical operations addition subtraction multiplication
221. oint of the arc in the selected plane are specified along with the offsets of the center of the arc from the current location In this format it is OK if the end point of the arc is the same as the current point It is an error if when the arc is projected on the selected plane the distance from the current point to the center differs from the distance from the end point to the center by more than 0 0002 inch if inches are being used or 0 002 millimeter Gf millimeters are being used The center is specified using the I and J words There are two ways of interpreting them The usual way is that I and J are the center relative to the current point at the start of the arc This is sometimes called Incremental IJ mode The second way is that I and J specify the center as actual coordinates in the current system This is rather misleadingly called Absolute IJ mode The IJ mode is set using the button and LED on the Settings screen The choice of modes is to provide compatibility with commercial controllers You will probably find Incremental to be best In Absolute it will of course usually be necessary to use both I and J words unless by chance the arc s center is at the origin When the X Y plane is selected program G2 X Y Z A I J or use G3 instead of G2 The axis words are all optional except that at least one of X and Y must be used I and J are the offsets from the current location or coordinates depending on IJ mode X and Y dire
222. ol tangent to the programmed path on the appropriate side If a convex corner 1s on the path an arc is inserted to go around the corner The radius of the arc is half the diameter given in the tool table When cutter radius compensation is turned off no special exit move takes place The next move is what it would have been if cutter radius compensation had never been turned on and the previous move had placed the tool at its current position Programming Entry Moves In general an alignment move and two entry moves are needed to begin compensation correctly However where the programmed contour is a material edge contour and there is a convex corner on the contour only one entry move plus possibly a pre entry move is needed The general method which will work in all situations is described first We assume here that the programmer knows what the contour 1s already and has the job of adding entry moves General Method The general method includes programming an alignment move and two entry moves The entry moves given above will be used as an example Here is the relevant code again N0010 Gl X1 Y4 5 make alignment move to point C N0020 G41 Gl Y3 5 turn compensation on and make first entry move to point B N0030 G3 X2 Y2 5 Il make second entry move to point A Figure 6 26 shows the two entry moves but not the alignment move First pick a point A on the contour where it is convenient to attach an entry arc Specify an arc outsi
223. on Figure 8 18 shows probing for three points to find the center of a feature that could not be located by the simple X Y Probing screen Setting Offsets from Points Once you have a point or some points you can use them to set work offsets by using the green buttons Figure 8 18 Finding a tricky center Origin X Y or X and Y from a point The buttons outside the circle use just one point If you only want to set the X offset use Point 1 If you want to set just the Y offset use Point 2 To set both X and Y use Point 3 Origin X and Y are center of an arc Set all three Points to lie on the circle or arc Click the Origin is Center button Although the picture on the screen implies the points are roughly equally spaced around the circle and this will give the greatest accuracy you can work with a small segment of arc drawn from a large circle whose center is outside the machining envelope by many feet As the points can be centers of holes it can find the center of a set of holes on a pitch circle like a pipe flange Origin X and Y are at intersection of line and perpendicular from a point Again you set all three Points Points 2 and 3 define the line and Point from where the perpendicular is to be dropped Click the Origin is corner button The picture implies that the perpendicular should intersect the line between the probed points but this is not necessary The corner can be on any projection of the line This functio
224. on as quickly as possible Unless used when Paused it may result in lost steps especially on stepper motor driven axes and restarting may not be valid Rewind Rewinds the currently loaded part program Single BLK Single BLK is a toggle with indicator LED In Single Block mode a Cycle Start will execute the next single line of the part program Pause Pause brings the current move to a controlled stop applying deceleration etc Resumption by Cycle Start is always safe Although jogging while paused is possible we do not recommend doing it Line Number Line DRO is the ordinal number of the current line in the G code display window starting from 0 Note that this is not related to the N word line number You can type into this DRO to set the current line Run from Here Run from here performs a dummy run of the part program to establish what the modal state G20 G21 G90 G91 etc should be and then prompts for a move to put the controlled point in the correct position to for the start of the line in Line Number You should not attempt to Run from here in the middle of a subroutine Set next line Like Run from here but without the preparatory mode setting up processing Using Tormach PCNC 1100 5 10 30625 Rev C3 1 Machine controls Block Delete The Ignore Blocks button toggles the Block Delete switch If enabled then lines of G code which start with a slash 1 e will not be executed Optional Stop
225. onds e Retract the Z axis at traverse rate to clear Z G83 Cycle The G83 cycle often called peck drilling is intended for deep drilling or milling with chip breaking See also G73 The retracts in this cycle clear the hole of chips and cut off any long stringers which are common when drilling in aluminum This cycle takes a Q number which represents a delta increment along the Z axis Program Using Tormach PCNC 1100 7 24 30625 Rev C3 1 Programming language reference Goo 2 YA Bie As Re Da Oe Preliminary motion as described above Move the Z axis only at the current feed rate downward by delta or to the Z position whichever is less deep Rapid back out to the clear Z Rapid back down to the current hole bottom backed off a bit Repeat steps 1 2 and 3 until the Z position is reached at step 1 Retract the Z axis at traverse rate to clear Z It is an error if e The Q number is negative or zero 7 7 23 5 G85 Cycle The G85 cycle is intended for boring or reaming but could be used for drilling or milling Program G85 X Y Z A R L Preliminary motion as described above Move the Z axis only at the current feed rate to the Z position Retract the Z axis at the current feed rate to clear Z 7 7 23 6 G86 Cycle The G86 cycle is intended for boring This cycle uses a P number for the number of seconds to dwell Program G86 X Y Z A R L P Preliminary motion as described above Move the Z axis
226. only at the current feed rate to the Z position Dwell for the P number of seconds Stop the spindle turning Retract the Z axis at traverse rate to clear Z Restart the spindle in the direction it was going The spindle must be turning before this cycle is used It is an error 1f e The spindle is not turning before this cycle is executed 7 7 23 7 G88 Cycle The G88 cycle is intended for boring This cycle uses a P word where P specifies the number of seconds to dwell Program G88 X Y Z A R L P Preliminary motion as described above Move the Z axis only at the current feed rate to the Z position Dwell for the P number of seconds Stop the spindle turning Stop the program so the operator can retract the spindle manually Restart the spindle in the direction it was going 7 7 23 8 G89 Cycle The G89 cycle is intended for boring This cycle uses a P number where P specifies the number of seconds to dwell Program G89 X Y Z A R L P 30635 Rev C3 1 7 25 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 Programming language reference e Preliminary motion as described above e Move the Z axis only at the current feed rate to the Z position e Dwell for the P number of seconds e Retract the Z axis at the current feed rate to clear Z 7 7 24 Distance Mode G90 and G91 Interpretation of the CS code can be in one of two distance modes absolute or incremental To go into absolute distance mode program G90 In absolute d
227. ontrol Pal load 5 8 LY seed Contool Famy yates oti a saad tal alas 5 9 5 2 2 6 Program Running Control Famil yzat ria AA A AAT 5 10 522 1 To lpath Control Family eci a a E A E A 5 11 A A A E uate nattedsannd eaeste bias 5 12 5 2 2 9 Work Offset and Tool Table Control Family ooooccccoccnnoncnnnnonnnnncnnonaninonnnnnns 5 13 2 2010 MDF md Teach Control Panta 5 13 iz all LOOP Controlan dad 5 13 5 2 2 12 Modes and Mode Alarm Control Baily codi 5 14 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 li 30625 Rev C3 1 Contents 5 2 2 13 Rotational Diameter Control Family oooocccoccccnocnncnonnnoncnnnnnnnnonocnnonncnonacnnononnnns 5 14 5 2 2 14 Toolchange Position Control Family oocoooocccoocnncnocnnoncnnnnnncnonocnnonccnonocnnononnnns 5 14 5 2 2 15 vinhibms ana Oyertides Control Ball Yeon tte 5 15 LL LO BECAS and Speeds E acute ioslicatada 5 15 IL apps Conmeuratiom Family osani ane E 5 15 5 22 18 Wise Sene s Control Rama lali clitids 5 16 5 3 USB JOSS Pendadts nda Socseconewex ces E Ea EE EREE Eanan 5 16 Soe doe Shuttle CONOCE A RAR A EA 5 16 Si Keypad Pond a ae aN 5 17 6 USING MUNIDIE TOONS oca o DE iia 6 1 6 1 Offsets and Coordinate Systems s ccsscocsssssssssocsssccssssovesscvssssovessscssssovsescsesssovssscossesceess 6 1 6 2 Measuring TeChiniqQue sssini idas 6 2 O20 Roll Your Own Gaute Metodo 6 2 022 RON Gine Metodo iia 6 3 023 Adjustable Parallel Method as as das dd 6 4 024 Comments OneA
228. ool is chosen to be the Master Tool All other tool lengths are related to this be they shorter or perhaps longer For maximum accuracy of Z positions you will always use the master tool when setting the work offsets in the ways described above although at the risk of some accumulated errors you will realize that this can be done with any tool First we will look at how the offsets work in theory after some tools have been set up then in the following sections see how to set them up with your tool collection Suppose there are three tools Tool 1 has length 5 1 tool 2 is 3 2 and tool 3 is 3 3 These sizes should be easy to remember from the fractions Do not worry for now where the lengths are measured from if you like assume it 1s from the front of the spindle nose 30635 Rev C3 1 6 7 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 We will assume that the machine has just been switched on and referenced and we will work on the Offsets screen We jog the Z axis down to a convenient position about 4 down from the home switch and put in tool 1 The Control Software has to know which tool is in use so we Program coord Work Offset G54 G52 G92 Offset T Current Too Machine coord Do notundate by ping new value _Offset On Off E X coord 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Tool Diameter SY 0 000C _Zero Touch 0 500 Y coord 0 0000 O EN 0 0000 appiedvath 64112 y 0 0 0000 _Zero Touch Pear Gr n A 0 0000 5100 Z 3 7794 Zero
229. operty This document is intended to give enough details about how to install setup and use your PCNC 1100 It assumes that you have appropriate experience and or access to training for any Computer Aided Design Manufacture software that you intend to use with the machine This document assumes familiarity with using typical Microsoft Windows applications programs as the control software for the PCNC runs under the Windows operating system Tormach LLC is dedicated to continual improvement of its products so suggestions for enhancements corrections and clarifications will be gratefully received Tormach LLC Art Fenerty and John Prentice assert their right to be identified as the authors of this work The right to make copies of this manual is granted solely for the purpose of training courses related to evaluation of and or use of the PCNC 1100 It is not permitted under this right for third parties to charge for copies of this manual beyond the cost of printing Every effort has been made to make this manual as complete and as accurate as possible but no warranty or fitness is implied The information provided is on an as is basis The authors and publisher shall have neither liability nor responsibility to any person or entity with respect to any loss or damages arising from the information contained in this manual Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation If other trademarks are us
230. or the control software Accept all the defaults You will now be told to reboot before running the Control Software This installation process puts a copy of your numbered license file and the working license into the PCNC folder Vital Re boot After you have initially installed the Control Mach2 Compatability Test Diagnostics Software program you must Interrupt Used Fulse per Second in 25K hz Mode re boot your computer This reboot is vital If you do not a eco Timer Variations do it then you will get into a CPU Speed ca 100 great difficulties which can E AHEHHHHHE I I only be overcome by using T the Windows Control Panel Apic Timing Constant T A A to uninstall the driver ice E 20 manually So please reboot E o A A l a a now G 0 02 04 06 0 8 1 Previous One Second If you are interested in knowing why the reboot is required then read on otherwise skip to the next Figure 2 12 The DriverTest program display section Although the Control Software will appear to be a single program when you are using it it actually consists of two parts a driver which is installed as part of Windows like a printer or network driver and a graphical user interface GUI The reasons for this division are complex but the driver is the most important and ingenious part The Control Software must be able to send very accurately timed signals to control the axes of the machine tool Windows like
231. ouch Goto Tool Change Home key Ref XYZ Ref Figure 6 1 Illustrating Program and Machine coordinates This relationship is just a series of Offsets The offsets are numbers which are added by the Control Software to your program X Y Z coordinates to get the machine coordinates Figure 6 1 is a view of part of the Offsets screen You will probably find it useful to look X 1 l 0000 l Ret x at this screen on your machine as you read this Zero material The machine is set up in Inch Y 1 l 4000 Ref Y imperial units If your machine is set up for wens metric units then you can either experiment Z 0 1 000 l Ret Z Zero a with the same numbers as we use or of course roughly convert them to inches A 0 0000 l RefA To obtain figure 6 1 the PCNC was referenced Canan ra Machine Coords Ref XYZ notice the green referenced LEDs at right of AO ELIO screen and a tool jogged to the surface of a Figure 6 2 di ae ARE to piece of stock just touching the surface near the di 30635 Rev C3 1 6 1 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 6 2 6 2 1 top left corner So you can imagine it the jogging moved the Z axis down about 9 5 the tool 3 to the right and 2 5 towards the front of the machine The Zero button for X Y and Z axes was clicked we could have typed O into the axis DROs with exactly the same effect The Manual Data Input MDI was then used to go to the program coordinate position X 1 Y 1 4 and
232. out moving the axis you would enter Figure 6 8 Gauge size entered to DRO 0 547 into the Z axis DRO figure 6 8 The program coordinates say Z 0 547 and the tool is 0 547 above the stock so for example GOO Z0 0 will move the tool so it exactly touches the stock You may have noticed that in making FirstPart we cheated a little by assuming the paper gauge was zero thickness This is often sufficiently accurate and allows use of the Zero buttons rather than typing a value Using the Touch Buttons The roll you own and roller gauge methods will always give you the same measurement to be typed in On the Offsets screen you can do this once and use it each time you want to set up an offset 0 000d OL Length T 0 0000 Goto Tool C The gauge thickness is typed into the Touch la pl Touch Correction DRO on the Offsets screen Figure ce E Bash 0 2500 6 9 shows this being set for the 14 roller Gauge Block thickness etc NE AltT gauge Note the correction is also enabled as shown by the LED by the On Off button Figure 6 9 Entering roller gauge size When the gauge is in place clicking the Touch button for the axis will set the offset Figure 6 10 shows the program coordinates after Touch on Z axis Z coor 0 2500 9 8 3 0 000 0 0 623 Zero Length To A coord 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 ero Touch Goto Tool Ch Offset table entry 1 Click to ch Touch 0 2500 cf oa 5 Correction 0 250 Ga
233. ovement of the table and head of the PCNC Click the Ref All button The Z axis will first move up to the top of z X k 0 l 0 0 0 0 Ref al the column stop at the switch and then move down a fraction The Z DRO will be set to zero and its LED turn to green This Y 0 0 0 0 0 will be followed by the same action with X and Y Be wary the first time you do this Z 0 0 0 0 0 and 1f an axis does not stop at 1ts switch you must hit the EStop button on the Machine Coords PCNC control panel and look at the Maintenance Troubleshooting section of Figure 3 2 Referenced and ready to use this manual figure 3 2 30635 Rev C3 1 3 1 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 3 2 Making your first part Note It is very important to reference the PCNC before using it Failure to do so can result in running into the limit switches or worse the tool attempting to cut into the vise or table The Control Program tries to protect you from this sort of trouble but intentionally leaves the responsibility of referencing to you You can repeat the referencing operation at any time if you have reason to suspect that the PCNC is in the wrong position e g an error in a depth of cut has stalled the machine The Control Software now knows exactly where the PCNC axes are and has called this home position X 0 0 Y 0 0 and Z 0 0 You probably think that this position is not very convenient and you are correct The Control Software will let yo
234. p scraper or brush e Make an adjustment to the part fixture coolant nozzle or take measurements e Remove protective shields or safeguards do not reach for the part tool or fixture around a guard 11 Keep work area well lit Ask for additional light if needed 12 Keep the computer area clear of clutter Recognize that machine motion can occur when certain keys are pressed Objects falling on the keyboard can result in unexpected motion Using Tormach PCNC 1100 1 2 30625 Rev C3 1 Preface 13 Avoid getting pinched in places where the table saddle or spindle head create pinch points while in motion 14 Securely clamp the work piece in a vise on the table or in the fixture Use proper holding clamping attachments and position them clear of the toolpath Be aware of larger pieces that will be cut free during operations loose parts can become projectiles 15 Always use proper feeds and speeds as well as depth and width of cut to prevent tool breakage 16 Use proper cutting tools for the job 17 Do not use dull or damaged cutting tools They break easily and become dangerous projectiles Never use longer or larger tools than necessary 18 Chips and dust from certain materials e g magnesium can be flammable Fine dust from normally non flammable materials can be flammable or even explosive 19 Chips and dust from certain materials can be toxic Vapours from certain overheated materials can be toxic Always che
235. panel In this case the Ref A button can be used to move to this switch in the same way as the linear axes If you do this accidentally with no switch connected then the movement can be cancelled with the Esc key Diameter Compensation Feature To understand this it is useful to recall what happens on a G01 line move where two axes like X and Y are coordinated The control software will attempt to move along the line at the feed rate requested by the F word or DRO For example a move at a feed rate of 10 inches per minute from X 0 Y 0 to X 1 0 Y 1 0 will move both the X and Y axes at about 7 inches per minute By Pythagoras Theorem the diagonal speed is y T 77 9 9 Now if a move of X needs to be coordinated with one of A there is a problem because A moves in degrees We only know how fast the tool is moving through the material if we also know the diameter of the part in the rotary axis The Control Software will take this value from the Rotational Diameter DRO on the settings page Note This feature only applies to coordinated moves A single G01 move of the A axis will use the feed rate defined by the F word as a number of degrees per minute Fourth Axis Applications General use of a fourth axis requires CAD CAM software that will create a part program using the A axis but useful work can be done with three axis software Figure 8 1 Engraving on a cylinder 30635 Rev C3 1 8 1 Using Tormach PCNC 1100
236. peat the following one or two moves are made e A straight traverse parallel to the X Y plane to the given X Y position e A straight traverse of the Z axis only to the R position if it is not already at the R position If the XZ or YZ plane is active the preliminary and in between motions are analogous 7 7 23 2 G81 Cycle The G81 cycle is intended for drilling Program G81 X Y Z A R L e Preliminary motion as described above e Move the Z axis only at the current feed rate to the Z position e Retract the Z axis at traverse rate to clear Z Example 1 Suppose the current position is 1 2 3 and the X Y plane has been selected and the following line of NC code is interpreted GOO Ged G90 XA Yo All R236 30635 Rev C3 1 7 23 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 7 7 23 3 7 7 23 4 Programming language reference This calls for absolute distance mode G90 old Z retract mode G98 and calls for the G81 drilling cycle to be performed once The X number and X position are 4 The Y number and Y position are 5 The Z number and Z position are 1 5 The R number and clear Z are 2 8 The following moves take place e a traverse parallel to the X Y plane to 4 5 3 e a traverse parallel to the Z axis to 4 5 2 8 e a feed parallel to the Z axis to 4 5 1 5 e a traverse parallel to the Z axis to 4 5 3 Example 2 Suppose the current position is 1 2 3 and the X Y plane has been selected and the following line of NC cod
237. permanently fixed to the table It would be useful to remember the top left corner of its fixed jaw as this is a simple datum to locate stock Other Work Offsets The control software allows you to setup a total of more than 250 different sets of work offsets most people will only use the first six as these are easily selected using the codes G54 to G59 The Offsets screen has a pair of buttons to select the work offsets that are in use and displayed figure 6 22 Edit Save table How lt Work Offset gt i 0 0000 Touch 0 0000 When you Touch or enter values in the axis DROs then you will update the current set of work offsets yE S p You can save the work offset values using the Edit Save table Now button above the Work Offset DROs This button displays the complete table It can be edited manually and is saved by clicking the Save button The dialog 1s closed by clicking OK Le e If you do not save the work offset table then when you close down the Control Program you will be asked if you Touch want to save it Unless you have made a serious error in Do not update by typing new value setting up work offsets you should save them or you will into offset DRO 11654109215 in use T have to enter them again next time you run the Control Cc Program We advise you not to alter the G54 offsets 2 although it is remembered from run to run of the Control Figure 6 22
238. photographs from all angles including detail photographs of any wires or oil lines that will be take apart Dowel pins must be removed before the bolts on disassembly Dowel pins must be installed before the bolts on assembly Tormach strongly recommends that all precision sliding and rotating joints remain intact during disassembly This means that you should not remove ballscrews bearings or separate sliding joints For example in reference to the head and column exploded view drawing D40134 you should not separate item 82 Z axis slide from item 75 column Instead you should separate item 19 Head Casting from item 82 Z axis slide Detailed advice should be sought from Tormach support Appendices 10 1 10 2 Appendix 1 Not Used Appendix 2 Exploded Parts Views The following pages identify the mechanical and electrical components of the PCNC 1100 cross referenced to part numbers 30635 Rev C3 1 10 15 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 45 46 47 7 l 15 39 40 37 15 38 4 39 40 41 42 43 4 36 IS 26 6 29 27 49 28 34 30 Sl 32 33 35 15 24 2 23 NO Y 16 5 21 24 VI t oN m OoOMmmMmMmi ay Aj j ON NIOINIANIMIM MI mn NO No Mm NIN Was A gt K e ay 00 N lt N D A f AOS Wi A O AN H ABA A Ja MA A M i Hy Y Mi Wi A HN fi Mj a Ars A Y LOY PN PQ NON SY YT A AN NA OW a a WY E E AM S S a
239. preference e This manual ALWAYS the first place to check e Related documents found at http www tormach com documents htm e Our website at www tormach com e Email to info tormach com e Telephone Tormach at 608 849 8381 e Fax Tormach at 209 885 4534 Outside of the Scope of Intended Use Applications for the equipment or modifications of the equipment outside of the Intended Use Statement are supported through consulting engineering not through our free support policy There are no limits to the applications that Tormach products can be used for or to the modifications that can be applied to the Tormach machinery Tormach designs use standard industrial components and incorporate the principles of Open Architecture specifically to allow and promote these variations With Open Architecture controls industrial engineers will find Tormach products cost effective to incorporate into larger manufacturing systems or with easily separable base column and head sections manufacturing engineers looking to design specialized in house equipment will find they can use the base as a low cost motorized X Y table Some machinists may want to convert a stepper mill to servos or some software engineers may want to replace the Tormach approved software with something of their own creation All of the technical information and insight required to support these variations from the intended use cannot possibly be foreseen If the extensive documentatio
240. programmed path when the tool radius is positive program G41 D To turn cutter radius compensation on right 1 e the cutter stays to the right of the programmed path when the tool radius is positive program G42 D The D word is optional if there is no D word the radius of the tool currently in the spindle will be used If used the D number should normally be the slot number of the tool in the spindle although this is not required It is OK for the D number to be zero a radius value of zero will be used G41 and G42 can be qualified by a P word This will override the value of the diameter of the tool 1f any given in the current tool table entry It is an error if e The D number is not an integer is negative or is larger than the number of carousel slots e The XY plane is not active e Cutter radius compensation is commanded to turn on when it is already on The behavior of the machining system when cutter radius compensation is ON is described in the chapter on Cutter Compensation Notice the importance of programming valid entry and exit moves 7 7 14 Tool Length Offsets G43 G44 and G49 To use a tool length offset program G43 H where the H number is the desired index in the tool table It is expected that all entries in this table will be positive The H number should be but does not have to be the same as the slot number of the tool currently in the spindle The H 30635 Rev C3 1 7 19 Using Tormach PCNC 1100
241. provide lethal electrical shocks Both power inputs should be unplugged before working in the electrical cabinet Grounding Both primary and secondary power inputs must be grounded During installation it is not enough to assume that the ground line of a wall outlet is properly grounded Check continuity between the machine frame and true earth ground water pipe or similar to ensure a good ground connection A Ground Fault Interrupt or GFI 1 e Residual Current Circuit Breaker or RCCB in Europe outlet must be used to supply the power to the 115 VAC power input Your computer monitor and coolant system are not bolted to the machine frame so proper grounding cannot be assumed The combination of electrical power and water based coolant systems makes the GFI protection very important Electrical Panel NEVER operate the machine tool with the cabinet door open NEVER allow a coolant pump to operate with the cabinet door open DO NOT allow the coolant system to flow coolant directly at the cabinet door seal or on the operator console controls Neither the cabinet door seal nor the electrical controls are sealed against liquids Retained Electrical Power Electronic devices within the electrical cabinet may retain dangerous electrical voltages after the power has been removed Electrical Service Certain service and troubleshooting operations require access to the electrical cabinet while the electrical power is on Only qualified electrical te
242. r box to the table X axis or frame of the machine Y and Z axis Move the axis so the mounting box comes free of its pins The screw and box are supported on the ballnut so take care not to apply forces that could bend the screw figure 9 6 Figure 9 8 Another view of e You can now rotate the box by hand and get a sensitive tightening the lock nut feel for the torque caused by the preload on the bearings Rotation should be smooth with a small perceptible drag this corresponds to a medium preload of about 150 Ibs If the rotation feels tight you have too much preload and will dramatically shorten the life of the bearings If the rotation is free and or the box can be rocked perpendicular to the screw axis then you have little on no preload and backlash will be excessive This test should be done with the lock nut tight It is best to support the box on its dowel pins when adjusting the nuts to avoid damaging the ballnut or risking bending the screw Finally remount the box and motor ensuring that the coupling is symmetrically fitted to the motor shaft and the screw end and is fully tightened figure 9 7 amp 9 8 9 5 6 Speed Calibration This procedure is not necessary for operation of a machine it is only recommended as an improvement to spindle speed accuracy The spindle speed in your PCNC 1100 is factory calibrated but your computer is not calibrated to your machine The variations among PCs will affect
243. r easy access Manual Driver Installation and Un installation You only need to read and do this section if you have not successfully run the DriverTest program The driver Mach3 sys can be installed and uninstalled manually using the Windows control panel e Open the Windows Control Panel and double click on the icon or line for System e Select Hardware and click Add Hardware wizard As mentioned before the Control Software s driver works at the lowest level in Windows Windows will look for any new actual hardware and find none e Tell the wizard you have already installed it and then proceed to the next screen e You will be shown a list of hardware Scroll to the bottom of this and select Add a new hardware device and move to the next screen e On the next screen you do not want Windows to search for the driver so select Install the hardware that I manually select from a list Advanced e The list you are shown will include an entry for Mach x pulsing engine Select this and go to the next screen e Click Have disk and on the next screen point the file selector to your directory C PCNC3 by default Windows should find the file Mach3 inf Select this file and click Open Windows will install the driver The driver can be uninstalled rather more simply e Open the Control panel and double click on the icon or line for System e Select Hardware and click Device Manager e You will be shown a list of devices and their
244. r of the cutter currently in the spindle is 0 97 and the diameter assumed in generating the toolpath was 1 0 then the value in the tool table for the diameter for this tool should be 0 03 Here is an NC program which cuts material away from the outside of the triangle in the figure N0010 Gl X1 Y4 5 make alignment move N0020 G41 Gl Y3 5 turn compensation on and make first entry move NOO30 G3 X2 Y2 5 Il make second entry move NOO40 G2 X2 5 Y2 J 0 5 cut along arc at top of toolpath NOUSO Gl Y 1 cut along right side or toolpath NOOGO G2 x2 Y l 5 I 03 cue along are at bottom right or tool path NO070 Gl X 2 cut along bottom side of toolpath NOOSO G2 X 2 0 1 06 J0 gt cut along arc at bottom lert of toolpath NO090 Gl X1 7 Y2 4 cut along hypotenuse of toolpath NOLOO EZ X2 YZse 10 3 J 0 4 cut along arc at top of tool path N0110 G40 turn compensation off This will result in the tool making an alignment move and two entry moves and then following a path slightly inside the path shown on the left in figure 6 24 going clockwise around the triangle This path is to the right of the programmed path even though G41 was programmed because the diameter value is negative First Move Using Tormach PCNC 1100 6 14 30625 Rev C3 1 Offsets The algorithm used for the first move when the first move is a straight line is to draw a straight line from the destination point which is tangent to a circle whose center is at the current point a
245. r or to ignore the line Currently programs are limited to 999 999 lines of code Spaces and tabs are allowed anywhere on a line of code and do not change the meaning of the line except inside comments This makes some strange looking input legal For example the line g0x 0 12 34y 7 is equivalent to g0 x 0 1234 y7 Blank lines are allowed in the input They will be ignored Input is case insensitive except in comments thus any letter outside a comment may be in upper or lower case without changing the meaning of a line 7 5 1 Line Number A line number is the letter N followed by an integer with no sign between 0 and 99 999 999 written without commas Line numbers may be repeated or used out of order although normal 30635 Rev C3 1 7 5 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 Programming language reference practice is to avoid such usage A line number is not required to be used and this omission 1s common but it must be in the proper place if it is used 7 5 2 Subroutine Labels A subroutine label is the letter O followed by an integer with no sign between O and 99999 written with no more than five digits 000009 is not permitted for example Subroutine labels may be used in any order but must be unique in a program although violation of this rule may not be flagged as an error Nothing else except a comment should appear on the same line as a subroutine label Note that line numbers are not permitted in the current release Bo besme
246. rds etc The Scale LED will flash as a reminder that a scale is set for an axis The value defined by G51 will appear and can be set in the Scale DRO Negative values mirror the coordinates about the relevant axis The G50 button executes a G50 command to set all scales to 1 0 Correction Radius Rotary axes can have the approximate size of the work piece defined using the Rotational Diameter control family This size is used when making blended feed rate calculations for coordinated motion including the 4th Axis The LED indicates that a non zero value is defined Jog Shuttle Axis The axis that is selected for jogging by the Tormach Jog Shuttle Controller is indicated by a LED by the top left corner of the corresponding DRO 5 2 2 3 Jogging Control Family Jogging can be performed in two ways a using the I Jog ON OFF Ctri Alt gt Jf keyboard or optional Keypad pendant or b Using the Joa S Num optional Tormach Jog Shuttle Controller _ Jog Step Num Keyboard Jogging 0 001 y Step Whenever the Jog ON OFF button is displayed on the Jog Mode Num current screen then the axes of the machine can be jogged E EI using the jog hotkeys on main keyboard or a pendant Cont step keyboard slow Jog Rate BE If the Jog ON OFF button is not displayed or it is toggled to Dn 10 s i Up OFF then keyboard jogging is not allowed for safety Sul dele ho OW eL Vale e Metals reasons Figure 5 11 Jogging control family There are two mode
247. rs A machining system may be in many modes at the same time with one mode from each modal group being in effect figure 7 2 For several modal groups when a machining system is ready to accept commands one member of the group must be in effect There are default settings for these modal groups When the machining system is turned on or otherwise re initialized the default values are automatically in effect The modal groups for G codes are e group 1 G00 G01 G02 G03 G38 2 G80 G81 G82 G84 G85 G86 G87 G88 G89 motion group 2 G17 G18 G19 plane selection group 3 G90 G91 distance mode group 5 G93 G94 feed rate mode group 6 G20 G21 units group 7 G40 G41 G42 cutter radius compensation group 8 G43 G49 tool length offset group 10 G98 G99 return mode in canned cycles group 12 G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 G59 G59 xxx coordinate system selection group 13 G61 G61 1 G64 path control mode The modal groups for M codes are group 4 M0 M1 M2 M30 stopping Y group 6 M6 tool change group 7 M3 M4 M5 spindle turning Y group 8 M7 M8 M9 coolant special case M7 and M8 may be active at the same time group 9 M48 M49 enable disable feed and speed override controls In addition to the above modal groups there is a group for non modal G codes group 0 G4 G10 G28 G30 G53 G92 G92 1 G92 2 G92 3 Figure 7 2 Modal groups Group 1 the f
248. s If you only change tools very infrequently or if your tools are held in a collet chuck which means that you cannot replace a given tool in exactly the same position each time it is inserted then you will be able to do all your machining by using work offsets If however you need to change tools frequently within a job then you will find it very worthwhile to acquire sufficient tool holders so that there is one for each commonly used tool Chapter 5 illustrates many of the available types of tool holder 6 4 1 Tormach Tooling System There are many advantages in basing your tool library on the Tormach Tooling System TTS It has a wide range of different styles of tool holder that are very reasonably priced and can be changed in the PCNC in a minimum time Tools in TTS holders can be put into the PCNC spindle in exactly the same position each time The Control Software can be set up to record the projection length of each tool and allow for the differences whenever a tool is changed This is done by another offset value the Tool Offset which is added into the conversion of a program Z coordinate to the corresponding machine Z coordinate If you use the TTS then there is no difficulty in combining it with other tools in ordinary R8 holders All the tool offset facilities remain available to you Figure 6 15 Close up of spot of light 6 4 2 How Tool Offsets Work The principle of tool offsets is very simple One t
249. s Continuous and Step which are selected by the Jog Mode button and indicated by the LEDs Continuous mode moves the axis or axes at the defined slow jog rate while the hotkeys are pressed The continuous jog speed is defined as shown below but this can be overridden by pressing Shift with the hotkey s A LED beside the Cont LED indicates this full speed jogging is selected The jogging speed used with hotkeys in Continuous mode is set as a percentage of the rapid traverse rate for the axis and for the Windows compatible joystick as a percentage of the feed for the given stick deflection by the Slow Jog Percentage DRO This can be set in the range 0 1 to 100 by typing into the DRO It can be nudged in 5 increments by the buttons or their hotkeys 30635 Rev C3 1 5 7 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 Machine Controls Step mode moves the axis by one increment as defined by the Step DRO for each key press The current feed rate as defined by the F word is used for these moves The size of increment can be set by typing it into the Step DRO or values can be set in this DRO by cycling through a set of predefined values using the Jog Step button Incremental mode is selected by the toggle button or if in Continuous Mode temporarily selected by holding down Ctrl before performing the jog Tormach Jog Shuttle Controller 5 2 2 4 This jogging device is available as an optional accessory part number 30616 figure 5 12 Many users will f
250. s each time you make a part Could the part be made in steel with the same program These are all good questions What you were told to do was to make this first part in the easiest way not necessarily the quickest or most accurate Subsequent chapters will tell you the answers to these questions and give you the understanding to make the right design and manufacturing decisions for yourself This experience and understanding will be invaluable whether you make production parts yourself or your designs are manufactured by others Using Tormach PCNC 1100 3 6 30625 Rev C3 1 From an idea to a part 4 Routes from an Idea to a Part This chapter describes the different ways in which you can define parts to be made with the PCNC 1100 It explains in detail how to use those features which are supplied built in to or bundled with the PCNC Control Software 4 1 Controlling the PCNC If you have run the sample program used in the previous chapter then you will have seen the control language of the PCNC scrolling through the G code window as it is executed Although this may look complex it is actually very simple It was originally designed for machines whose computer was comparable in power to the one in a microwave oven or multifunction TV remote control d F Keyboard _ os ontrols a E Keyboard Direct Code GO X2 1 Y3 4 Entry on MDI i PCNC 1100 Software
251. s in once pressed stops all motion and is the Emergency Stop EStop control The Stop button is released by a turning the button head a quarter turn clockwise Machine start is protected by a no volt relay from failure of the mains supply The PCNC requires Start to be pressed on re application of power Status LEDs The Machine LED indicates that the Start button has been pressed When it is lit then the Machine OK LED on the computer screen should be solid green The Computer LED indicates that the Control Software is running Spindle An important safety interlock is that the rotation of the spindle can be disabled while maintaining axis drive power by the Spindle Lockout key switch The switch on the belt guard door performs the same function These are used to ensure that the spindle cannot start when an R8 tool holder is being changed door open or when a tool is being changed in a collet chuck The controls to the right of the key switch are all concerned with manual control of the spindle If the Manual Auto switch is in Auto position then none of the other panel spindle controls have any effect In the Manual position the computer cannot control the spindle The rotary control potentiometer RPM x 100 controls the speed on the spindle when it is in Manual mode Its legend indicates approximate spindle speed in the two pulley ranges The Spindle Start spring loaded rocker starts the spindle and the Spindle Stop rocker stops
252. s to be in charge and runs normal user programs when it has nothing better to do itself So the Control Software cannot be a normal user program it must be at the lowest level highest priority in the computer inside Windows that is it handles interrupts Furthermore to do this at the high speeds possibly required each axis is given attention 25 000 times per second the driver needs to tune its own code Windows does not approve of this viruses often play this trick so it has to be asked to give special permission This process requires the reboot So if you have not done the re boot then Windows will give the Blue Screen of Death and the driver will be corrupt The only way out of this will be to manually remove the driver 30635 Rev C3 1 2 9 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 2 7 3 3 Preparation Having given these dire warnings it is only fair to say that although requested when upgrades are installed the reboot is only strictly required when the driver is first installed Windows XP boots reasonably quickly that it is not much hardship to do it every time Testing the Installation It is now highly recommended to test the system The Control Software is not a simple program It takes great liberties with Windows in order to perform its job in fact it actually runs Windows rather than Windows running it this means it will not work on all systems due to many factors For example QuickTime s system monitor qtask exe running in the ba
253. sed to ensure that the spindle cannot start when an R8 tool holder is being changed door open or when a tool is being changed in a collet chuck Turning the Spindle Lockout key or opening the spindle cover while the spindle is running will also stop the spindle Stopping the spindle in that way will not damage any components but it is generally a poor practice The controls to the right of the key switch are all concerned with manual control of the spindle If the Manual Auto switch is in the Auto position then none of the other spindle controls have any effect In the Manual position the computer control of the spindle is disabled Switch toManual and turn the speed control knob fully counterclockwise Press the Spindle Start rocker The spindle should start turning slowly in the clockwise forward or counterclockwise Reverse direction viewed from above depending on the setting of the Forward Reverse switch You can safely switch directions while the spindle is turning Try changing the speed using the rotary control knob The actual speed will depend upon which of the two pulley ratios you have selected Pressing the Spindle Stop rocker will halt the spindle The Coolant switch controls the power to the coolant pump outlet on the underside of the control cabinet In the Off position the outlet is not powered and the pump will not run In the On position power is applied to the outlet and the pump will run until the switch is switched to
254. ssion for example SIN 90 The unary operations are ABS absolute value ACOS arc cosine ASIN arc sine ATAN arc tangent COS cosine EXP e raised to the given power FIX round down FUP round up LN natural logarithm ROUND round to the nearest whole number SIN sine SQRT square root and TAN tangent Arguments to unary operations which take angle measures COS SIN and TAN are in degrees Values returned by unary operations which return angle measures ACOS ASIN and ATAN are also in degrees The FIX operation rounds towards the left less positive or more negative on a number line so that FIX 2 8 2 and FIX 2 8 3 for example The FUP operation rounds towards the right more positive or less negative on a number line FUP 2 8 3 and FUP 2 8 2 for example Parameter Setting A parameter setting is the following four items one after the other e a pound character e areal value which evaluates to an integer between 1 and 10320 e an equal sign e areal value e For example 3 15 is a parameter setting meaning set parameter 3 to 15 A parameter setting does not take effect until after all parameter values on the same line have been found For example if parameter 3 has been previously set to 15 and the line 3 6 G1 x 3 1s interpreted a straight move to a point where x equals 15 will occur and the value of parameter 3 will be 6 Comments and Messages Printable characters and whit
255. t ACPI PC oocoooncnnnccnnnncnnnnccnnnncnnonocnnonccnonncnnonnononncnnoncnnnnnos 26 10 4 Revision Story indi a 27 11 ccs queens tecucuweberecceseecetecseeuesevesesseeesees 28 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 vi 30625 Rev C3 1 Preface 1 Preface 1 1 Safety Any machine tool is potentially dangerous Computer controlled machines are potentially more dangerous than manual ones because for example a computer is quite prepared to plunge a 3 diameter facing cutter at 50 inches per minute into a block of high carbon steel or to mill the clamps off your table The PCNC 1100 can deliver sufficient force to break brittle tools to crush bones and to tear flesh This manual tries to give you guidance on safety precautions and techniques but because we do not know the details of your workshop or other local conditions we can accept no responsibility for the performance of the machine or any damage or injury caused by its use It is your responsibility to ensure that you understand the implications of what you are doing and to comply with any legislation and codes of practice applicable to your country or state 1 1 1 Electrical Safety Dual Power Input The PCNC 1100 has two electrical power inputs The primary supply is 230 VAC and is used for all axis and spindle motion The secondary supply is 115 VAC The secondary supply is used to provide power to the accessory outlets only and is not used for machine control Either power supply can
256. t anything while jogging the machine does not stop and although the probe tip has a lot of over travel there is a risk of bending it or breaking the ruby tip Bore Center Jog to position the probe tip so it 1s just below the top surface of the bore to be probed and anywhere roughly near the center No precision is needed in this position Click the Find Center and Set work origin button The probe will make three pairs of exploratory moves First it goes left and right X then X and so estimates the X coordinate of the center Then it goes to the estimated X center and probes back and forward Y and Y This gives the exact Y center Finally using this it refines the X center by the final pair of moves The initial X moves off the Y center could have been slightly inaccurate because of the oblique contact of probe tip with the bore Then the current work offsets typically by default the G54 system are set so the bore center is 0 0 the X Y origin As the probe tip is in the center the X and Y axis DROs will read 0 0 Position of a Face You can set the X origin of a plane face perpendicular to X or the Y origin of a plane face perpendicular to Y The Yellow buttons X X Y and Y determine which direction the probe will move You should start within 1 2 or P so of the face and with Z low enough so the tip hits the face After the probe trips it moves slightly away from the face that it has found and the control sof
257. t common U S usage is flash drive and we will use that from now on Please note G code programs should not however be run directly from the USB storage device Transfer the G code programs to the local hard disk and run them off the hard disk not off the flash drive e The computer can have network capability but it should not be used while the machine tool is being used In particular Ethernet cards which will auto negotiate to work at 10BaseT or 100BaseT should be set for a fixed speed or you will hear a tick from the steppers every second or so during jogging as Windows takes control to negotiate network speed Do not run G code programs off a network drive or remote computer e Do not allow background automatic updates to be active while running the mill Do not leave Foxfire Mozilla Internet Explorer or Netscape run in the background while operating the mill There are some features in the computer that will make operation of the PCNC more convenient Things to look for are e A computer which will boot up when it sees AC power switched on rather than needing you to press a button This feature generally is controlled by a BIOS option and can be enabled by entering the BIOS configuration mode e A keyboard that includes a small USB hub This will make it easy to plug in the pointing device mouse track ball a pendant and a USB flash drive e If you choose to use a mouse or trackball then you should get the opti
258. t of the coupling e A final check of alignment should be made when the machine is under computer control This involves loosening the motor retaining screws 1 4 turn and jogging the axis The motor should show no signs of wobbling If it does wobble or move relative to the coupling housing then the coupling screws should be slackened and retightened and the motor rechecked for movement When alignment is perfect retighten the motor fixing screws and refit the coupling box cover Figure 2 6 coupling the Y drive motor 2 4 Mounting the PCNC 2 4 1 Lifting onto Stand The machine can be lifted onto an operating stand by either of two methods from below using the base connection points or from above using a slinging technique In either case caution and common sense are needed for the protection of the machine and the people involved Lifting up to1000 lbs can be simple with proper preparation and good equipment but it is never trivial and the dangers involved should be taken seriously The work of lifting and placing heavy equipment is called rigging If you are not trained or prepared then you should seek the advice of those who are Professional riggers can be found in most areas 2 4 1 1 Lifting from Below The base of the machine has four s holes By sliding two steel bars into these holes at least 32 in length you end up with some outrigger wings that can be used in combination with a fork lift truck to li
259. t out the recess called a pocket Cutting the Actual Part Figure 3 8 Touching a tool You should now be ready to actually cut the part Jog the Z axis and swap back to the 14 tool You must now set this so it is just touching the surface of your material and define this as Z 0 There are many good ways of doing this and we will look at them in a later chapter For now you just need a thin sheet of paper or perhaps a plastic wrapper from a candy packet Jog the Z axis down to 4 or so above the material If you are using keyboard jogging change the Slow Jog DRO from 10 to 2 The Tormach Jog Shuttle Controller allows you to control the speed depending on how far you turn the ring Using Tormach PCNC 1100 3 4 30625 Rev C3 1 Making your first part Then with the paper below the tool carefully jog down until the paper just gets trapped by the tool You must avoid ramming the tool into the material you want to just touch the paper figure 3 8 When in position type O and Enter into the Z axis DRO You now have the Work Offsets set to suit your material thickness and length of tool Make certain you have properly shut the door protecting the motor and spindle belts or the spindle will not start and a non rotating tool will try to cut the work Click Cycle Start The program will stop for a tool change to tool 1 Just click Cycle Start as you have tool 1 already in the spindle The PCNC will cut the letters in
260. te Program Run button oooccccoocc 5 11 SINO le DUON erotica acia 5 10 Space required MINIMUM ooocccoccnnnnncnnnncnnnoncnnnnnss 2 2 Special Mach3 sys driver es AA A aes oie 2 10 a 2 10 specialdriver bat oooooncccooccnonccnnnocnnononnnoncnnnns 2 10 Specification O A eee es 9 3 Specifications E A O eer eee Ren ere 9 2 mechanica A II tera 9 2 SY SUC IT ro alates tc A amenbendee 9 3 Speed and feed override controlled by M48 M49 cc eeccccceseseeeeeeeees 7 29 Spindle ARA ital e 5 5 Changing the belt position cooocccooocno 2 14 Control panel Forward Reverse switch 2 13 Control panel Start switch oooocccooccnc o 2 13 Control panel Stop switch oooccoooom ooo 2 13 IOKIN r encanta bceaer AE 5 3 30625 Rev C3 1 Appendices TEOCKOUUS WILCH sunrise 2 13 MOS COCK WISC earn A 7 28 M04 counterclockwIse ooocccooccccoccnnnoo 7 28 MOSS SOP EP ON 7 28 Manaos rotas 2 13 Spindle controls Ol COMO AP apa 5 2 Spindle speed control family described ooocccooccncoccnnnnooo 5 8 S WOrd tO Stade aaa 7 31 Spindle speed calibration ooccooocccnoccncnncnnnnoo 9 8 Stand CADING haiena aa AE 2 5 SCARE DUTON AA ea E 2 13 On contol Panel a 5 2 Status LEDs On control panel ul E 5 2 A A O a s 5 10 Straight probe Example PLOCTAN sate ete 7 18 Ci AAA See Straight probe Subroutine call A E TE 7 29 repeating s
261. ted by the graphic on the buttons The angle and possibility of an arc are detected by making a main probe move followed by two side steps 0 2 either side of the main move The coordinate recorded in the selected Point DROs is the point where the main move contacts the work The diameter of the probe tip is allowed for so as for simple probing it must be correctly entered for tool 99 in the tool table The probe is returned to its initial point Progress of the operation is noted on screen in the message line If Verbose Messages are selected indicated by the LED next to the toggle button then details of what the probe found will be given If the face has a radius of curvature of greater than or equal to 20 the angle of the face or tangent to the large circle it is part of will be given If the radius of curvature is less than 20 then an estimate of the radius and the center point will be displayed Clearly these 30635 Rev C3 1 8 9 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 Machine upgrades and configuration will not be particularly accurate as they are derived from three points that are very close together but this information can be a useful check on the setting of the work When one point has been probed then another can be selected and the DROs set oy probing another feature In some situations you may not need to probe to set the Point DROs You can just type values into then followed of course by Enter Point 1 can also be zeroed by a butt
262. tem has an absolute coordinate system and 254 work offset fixture systems You can set the offsets of tools by G10 L1 P X z The P word defines the tool number to be set You can set the offsets of the fixture systems using G10 L2 P X Y Z Ar B C The P word defines the fixture to be set The X Y Z etc words are the coordinates for the origin of the axes in terms of the absolute coordinate system You can select one of the first seven work offsets by using G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 or G59 Any of the 254 work offsets can be selected by G59 P e g G59 P23 would select fixture 23 The absolute coordinate system can be selected by G59 PO You can offset the current coordinate system using G92 or G92 3 This offset will then be applied on top of work offset coordinate systems This offset may be cancelled with G92 1 or G92 2 You can make straight moves in the absolute machine coordinate system by using G53 with either GO or Gl 7 5 Formatting Code Lines Block A permissible line of input code consists of the following in order with the restriction that there is a maximum currently 256 to the number of characters allowed on a line e Optional block delete character which is a slash e Optional line number e Any number of words parameter settings and comments e End of line marker carriage return or line feed or both Any input not explicitly allowed is illegal and will cause the Interpreter to signal an erro
263. the preload a You can use a dial test indicator to measure backlash between the ballscrew end and the structure to which the bearings are mounted table for X axis or machine frame p SA for Y and Z Figure 9 6 Feeling preload in bearings axes b You can estimate the torque required to turn the ballscrew in the bearings If you are aiming for the smallest possible backlash then we suggest that you do both as it 1s not possible to be certain that you do not e have excessive preload by just measuring backlash ha To estimate bearing drag torque you need to eliminate the stepper detent torque and the ballnut friction This 1s done by allowing the stepper mounting box to rotate and measuring the torque required to do this a For adjusting the X axis position the table near the right hand end of its travel 1 e X near to zero This ensures that the bearing is near to the ballnut to minimize bending of the screw during tests MEA y Figure 9 7 Tightening the lock nut b Slacken the two screws clamping the coupling between the stepper Using Tormach PCNC 1100 9 8 30625 Rev C3 1 Machine upgrades and configuration shaft and ballscrew end c Remove the four cap screws holding the stepper motor to the coupler box Remove the stepper This is the reverse of the process for coupling the Y axis drive shown in section 2 3 d Remove the four cap screws holding the motor couple
264. ting of the retract mode either to the original Z position if that is above the R position and the retract mode is G98 or otherwise to the R position It is an error if e X Y and Z words are all missing during a canned cycle e AP number is required and a negative P number is used e AnL number is used that does not evaluate to a positive integer e Rotational axis motion is used during a canned cycle e Inverse time feed rate is active during a canned cycle e Cutter radius compensation is active during a canned cycle When the XY plane is active the Z number is sticky and it is an error if e The Z number is missing and the same canned cycle was not already active e The R number is less than the Z number When the XZ plane is active the Y number is sticky and it is an error if e The Y number is missing and the same canned cycle was not already active e The R number is less than the Y number When the YZ plane is active the X number is sticky and it is an error if e The X number is missing and the same canned cycle was not already active e The R number is less than the X number 7 7 23 1 Preliminary and In Between Motion At the very beginning of the execution of any of the canned cycles with the X Y plane selected if the current Z position is below the R position the Z axis is traversed to the R position This happens only once regardless of the value of L In addition at the beginning of the first cycle and each re
265. ton This causes the Control Figure 4 18 Wizard selection list Software to remember the values in each DRO so they will be available next time you choose the particular Wizard cne e Post Code button This causes the Wizard to generate a G code program to cut the shape with the sizes you have specified Most Wizards have a toolpath window and you will see the cuts to be made in it You can manipulate the toolpath display in the usual way with the mouse Rotate Zoom if Shift depressed and Pan if Right button drag e Exit button This returns you to the screen that was displayed before you ran the Wizard in preparation for running its code e An error line and button to Clear the text from it This will display any problems found trying to post code using the values that you defined 30635 Rev C3 1 4 9 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 4 4 1 3 4 4 1 4 From an Idea to a part Note A common problem when filling in the DROs of a Wizard is to forget to press Enter to accept each value It is easy to type a value and click in the next DRO This discards the typed value Mach2 CNC Control Program ArtSoft Corporation 2000 2004 6 x File Config View Wizards Operator Help X Center Pos Pocket Dia cw climb Mill F _ccw Conv Mill Stepover LAA Feedrate Y Center Pos TE Tool Dia Spindle RPM Rapid height Tool Number CW M3 Feed Plunge AN a Spindle
266. tor to the Z axis ballscrew Do not electrically disconnect the motor from the motor driver nor disconnect the motor driver from the DC power supply Any of those actions can allow the spindle head to lower with a dangerous and damaging velocity The gib plate is tapered down When the gib plate is moved down relative to the Z axis saddle part 82 the slide way will become tighter when it moves up the slide way will become looser With the machine is turned on move the Z axis up to a convenient height Remove the screws that attach the way cover part 74 to the Z axis saddle part 82 in order to gain access to the lower gib screw Loosen the lower gib screw backing the screw out about 2 or 3 turns Then place a wooden block under the head to prevent it from hitting the table Turn power off on the mill 30635 Rev C3 1 9 5 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 Appendices With power off and the head protected against hitting the table adjust the upper gib screw in until it takes about 40 to 80 Ibs of force to get the head started moving down You can get it moving by pulling down on the head The motion should stop quickly after you stop pulling down If a 5 lb pull gets it moving or if it does not stop moving down on its own after you stop pulling then the gib is not tight enough If you cannot get it to move down either it 1s too tight or else you forgot to turn off the machine You will not be able to move the Z axis head while the machine is on Once
267. tware sets the corresponding current work offset so that the face is coordinate 0 0 This is typically useful to set the two edges of a piece of material to be the origin of their axes 1 e the corner will be 0 0 0 0 There are occasions when you actually want to set both X and Y Figure 8 11 offset values to the location of the point probed To do this toggle 30635 Rev C3 1 8 5 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 8 2 2 2 Machine upgrades and configuration the green button Set X AND Y before making the probe move figure 8 11 Two different moves will not of course be meaningful if they use Set X and Y as the second overrides the first The probed face should not be significantly angled to the X or Y axes and should be flat Any errors here will be reflected in the accuracy of the probed position If you need to probe inclined and or radiused faces then you need to look at the Comprehensive X Y Probing screen Corner of Vise It is very quick for machining a small batch of parts that can be held in a vise to align the stock by feel to the corner of the fixed jaw This function allows you to find the back left corner which is a typical choice for X 0 0 Y 0 0 Jog the probe to 14 to 2 down and to the left South West of the corner of the fixed jaw The Z height make the probe tip be below the top of the jaws Set the Jaw width DRO to the size of your vise this will be remembered for subsequent uses of the screen
268. u define any other place to be 0 0 O when you are running a part program but will always keep a record of the machine position using home as machine zero Normally the axis DROs will show your coordinates for the position but you can see the Control Software machine coordinates by clicking the Machine Coords button A big flashing LED warns you that you are not looking at your version of the coordinates Loading a Demonstration Program The system comes with a demonstration program in the file C PCNC3 GCode FirstPart nc Run the Control Software and make sure the screen LEDs by Reset button are not flashing and that the axes are referenced ee Click the OpenG button You will be we given a Windows open file dialog a Navigate to the G code folder and open O o om o o the file figure 3 3 ise You will see the code of the program in Cycle Start AER the window at the left of the screen and the path that the tool will take in the toolpath display Use the mouse to drag with the left hand button in the toolpath display to rotate the display It behaves as if it is drawn inside a clear ball and the mouse turns the ball Pause spel ES 45 M MS Regenerate Ta Figure 3 3 File opening So that you understand what is going to happen we should look at the way this file was produced using a Computer Aided Design Computer Aided Manufacturing CAD CAM program The PCNC will produce parts designed in
269. uality way oil This could be Tonna 68 Shell Vactra No 2 Mobil Way lube 68 Sunoco WayLube 68 Texaco Febis 68 Esso or equivalent oil A shot of lubrication should be given for each 4 hours of operation and after the machine has stood unused for more than 48 hours Using Tormach PCNC 1100 9 4 30625 Rev C3 1 Machine upgrades and configuration Always make certain that the lubrication oil is clean The oil is delivered to 15 points throughout the machine This includes the 12 sliding surfaces 4 each on the 3 axes and 3 ballscrew nuts These are some of the most critical and expensive mechanical parts of the machine Any dirt or foreign material suspended in the oil is going to be delivered directly to these parts and can dramatically shorten the effective life of the machine Be sure to clean off the cover and surrounding area before refilling the oil reservoir The strainer at the top of the reservoir is only a screen it is not a filter Note e The pump is spring loaded where the spring force creates a very light hydraulic pressure You can get the oil out quicker by pushing a bit but apply too much force and you can pop off one of the oil lines e You will have a more uniform distribution of oil if the machine is moving when the hydraulic pressure is applied e The pump sucks up oil from the reservoir on the pull stroke and delivers it to the machine on the push stroke If at some point the oil pump seems much easier on
270. uck rather than i relying on the holder not turning in the 34 collet If you change a cutter or drill without opening the door to lock the spindle you should use the Spindle Lockout key to avoid any risk of the spindle starting If the Fig door is open the spindle is automatically inhibited _ ure 5 8 Changing spindle speed range i Using Tormach PCNC 1100 5 4 30625 Rev C3 1 9 2 5 2 1 5 2 2 5 2 2 1 Machine controls Spindle Speed Ranges The PCNC has two speed ranges The low range 350 300 to 1450 RPM 1s suitable for most machining operations with ferrous and other tough materials The high range 900 800 to 4500 RPM is suitable for small diameter cutters and plastics and non ferrous materials The lower of the quoted speeds in parentheses is only obtainable when the spindle is under manual control The range change 1s performed by moving the V belt from the motor from the top pair of pulleys high speed range to the lower pair low speed range To change the belt position e Open the protective door Use the rear handle to unlock the motor mounting plate and pull the motor forwards The belt will slacken and can be moved from one pulley to another figure 5 8 It is slightly fiddly to get the belt through the slot between the bottom pulley and the head casting e Retighten the belt so there is between s and 14 belt movement midway between the pulleys Lock the motor mounting and stow the
271. uge Block thickness etc On Off C Alt T Figure 6 10 Touch done on Z with roller gauge Setting X and Y Offsets It is sometimes quite acceptable to define the program coordinate zeros by eye as was done for FirstPart 30635 Rev C3 1 6 5 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 6 3 3 1 6 3 3 2 6 3 3 3 There are useful techniques when more accuracy is required With a Probe By far the most accurate and often the quickest way of setting X and Y offsets to a piece of stock material or to a part machined component is with a probe such as that illustrated in figure 6 11 Full details of the support for this accessory are given in chapter 8 Measuring Off an Edge Any of the above gauge methods can be used with a tool touching the edges of the stock or equally usefully the jaws of a vise used to hold the stock It is not really practicable to use a cutter because the spiral flutes do not give a clear place to gauge to A cylindrical bar e g Y diameter is ideal It should be mounted in a tool holder so that it runs true It is slightly easier to feel the contact point if a spherical finder is used This is shown in the illustrations below Figure 6 12 show the measurement of the coordinates on the corner of the fixed jaw of a machine vise The value to be use in the Touch Correction DRO or entered in the axis DRO is half the diameter of the probe tool plus the measurement of the gauge In the illustrated setup th
272. ur system In this case follow the next section and remove the driver manually then re install If the same thing happens please notify Tormach by e mail and you will be given guidance A few systems have motherboards which have hardware for an APIC timer but whose BIOS code does not use it This will confuse the Control Software install A DOS batch file specialdriver bat to run in a DOS window is available this will make the driver use the older 18529 interrupt controller To display the DOS window enter CMD as the program after Start Button gt Run You will need to repeat this process whenever you download an upgraded version of the Control Software as installing the new version will replace the special driver Using Tormach PCNC 1100 2 10 30625 Rev C3 1 2 7 3 4 2 7 3 5 2 8 Preparation DriverTest After a Software Crash Should you for any reason have a situation when the Control Software crashes this might be an intermittent hardware problem or software bug then you must run DriverTest as soon as possible after the Control Software has failed If you delay for two minutes then the Control Software driver will cause Windows to fail with the usual Blue Screen of Death Running DriverTest resets the driver to a stable condition even if the rest of the Control Software disappears unexpectedly If you have a troublesome system then you might find it worthwhile to create a shortcut for DiverTest exe and drag it onto the Desktop fo
273. urntable which turns on a rotational axis a counterclockwise turn from the point of view of the workpiece is accomplished by turning the turntable in a direction that for most common machine configurations looks clockwise from the point of view of someone standing next to the machine 7 1 4 Scaling Input It is possible to set up scaling factors for each axis These will be applied to the values of X Y Z A I J and R words whenever these are entered This allows the size of features machined to be altered and mirror images to be created by use of negative scale factors The scaling is the first thing done with the values and things like feed rate are always based on the scaled values The offsets stored in tool and fixture tables are not scaled before use Scaling may of course have been applied at the time the values were entered say using G10 7 1 5 Controlled Point The controlled point is the point whose position and rate of motion are controlled When the tool length offset is zero the default value this is a point on the spindle axis often called the gauge point that is some fixed distance beyond the end of the spindle usually near the end of a 30635 Rev C3 1 7 1 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 Programming language reference tool holder that fits into the spindle The location of the controlled point can be moved out along the spindle axis by specifying some positive amount for the tool length offset This amount is norm
274. us is known approximately the center of a circular hole may for example be found e Ifthe shank of the probe is known to be well aligned with the Z axis and the probe tip radius is known precisely more uses may be made of the straight probe command such as finding the diameter of a circular hole If the straightness of the probe shank cannot be adjusted to high accuracy it is desirable to know the effective radii of the probe tip in at least the X X Y and Y directions These quantities can be stored in parameters either by being included in the parameter file or by being set in a part program Using the probe with rotational axes not set to zero is also feasible Doing so is more complex than when rotational axes are at zero and we do not deal with it here Example Code As a usable example see the code for finding the center and diameter of a circular hole For this code to yield accurate results the probe shank must be well aligned with the Z axis the cross section of the probe tip at its widest point must be very circular and the probe tip radius 1 e the radius of the circular cross section must be known precisely If the probe tip radius is known only approximately but the other conditions hold the location of the hole center will still be accurate but the hole diameter will not NO10 probe to find center and diameter of circular hole NO20 This program will not run as given here You have to NO30 insert numbers i
275. values for the three example tools used above are shown in the table figure 6 20 I i AE E het 5 I Td e ee AL J E a A G54 Offset On Off E PA ToolTable OC Tool Description Diameter D Height tH Diam Wear Height Wear al IOC Jo Ref Tool 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Zen O 1 Rougher Master 0 5 po 0 0000 0 0000 OC 2 Two Flute ballnose 0 25 1 9 0 0000 0 0000 fen O 3 Slot drill 0 375 1 8 0 0000 0 0000 OC O 4 Empty 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 en E 5 Empty 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 es in F Figure 6 20 Editing TTS data into the Tool Table Finally click the Apply button followed by the OK button Using Tormach PCNC 1100 6 10 30625 Rev C3 1 Offsets Your tool definitions will be stored permanently but can of course be edited at any time if you change the tooling in your holders Note Some holders like the drill chucks can hold many tools and their lengths will be accurate enough even when they are interchanged In this case you can enter more tools with different numbers than you have holders for you will have to number the individual bits in their box 6 4 6 Tool Length Offsets with General Tooling 40 G2U G9U 694 654 G43 GY GE With conventional tool holders you will not be able to measure them with a height gauge unless of course you make your own dummy R spindle nose The following procedure uses the PCNC as a measuring rig Mount a piece of flat stock on the tabl
276. vise or other fixture Offsets used are often considered as advanced features but the design of the PCNC Control Software should make them easy to use You will find it worthwhile to master this chapter even if it needs more than one reading to do SO 6 1 Offsets and Coordinate Systems If you made the FirstPart then you will already have met and used the ideas explained in this section When you Reference the PCNC which should be done each time it is started the X Y and Z axes are moved so that they are just off the home switches and the machine coordinates are set to 0 0 We saw that this is not useful when you want to run a part program as the program will have its own view of where zero should be in the case of FirstPart this is the top left corner of the material for X 0 Y 0 and the top surface for Z 0 By moving the tool to this position and zeroing the axis DROs you defined relationship between the machine coordinates and the coordinates which the part program would use the Program Coordinates Program coord Work Offset G54 G52 G92 Offset T Current Tool 0 Machine coord encinas a X coord 1 0000 3 0000 0 0000 rouDameer X 4 0000f _Zero Touch 0 000 _Ref X Ycoora 14000 25000 0 0000 applied wtn 64112 y 3 90001 Zero Touch Ref Y Zcoord 0 1000 _ 9 5123 0 0000 0 000 z 9 6123 Zero Touch Length Touch Ref Z Acoord 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 A _ 0 0000 Zero T
277. want to understand exactly how some feature works Machine Operation Operator s Panel The operator s panel is illustrated in figure 5 1 It generally controls the PCNC directly and is independent of the software in the control computer When the Spindle and Coolant switches are in the Auto position then control of these functions is given to the computer Figure 5 1 Operator s panel Main Switch The main switch is mounted on the right hand side of the control cabinet A padlock can be inserted to lock it in the off position It controls the 230 volt power to the main machine and the separate power from the IEC inlet under the control cabinet to the computer and coolant system Note Disconnect the machine from the wall outlets before opening the control cabinet door as it is possible that live terminals can be touched even when the isolator is in the OFF position Computer On Off This rocker switch controls the power from the IEC inlet to the two outlets that are intended for the computer and monitor This is provided for convenience In some applications the computer monitor might be powered directly from a wall outlet and this computer circuit left unused or used for other functions such as to powering a work light 30635 Rev C3 1 5 1 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 Machine Controls Start and EStop The Start button will energize the circuits for the axis drives and for the spindle motor The Stop button which lock
278. words are optional any omitted axes will have their current value Any items in the command prototypes not explicitly described as optional are required It is an error if a required item is omitted U V and W are synonyms for A B and C Use of A with U B with V etc is erroneous like using A twice on a line In the detailed descriptions of codes U V and W are not explicitly mentioned each time but are implied by A B or C In the prototypes the values following letters are often given as explicit numbers Unless stated otherwise the explicit numbers can be real values For example G10 12 could equally well be written G 2 5 L 1 1 Ifthe value of parameter 100 were 2 G10 L 100 would also mean the same Using real values which are not explicit numbers as just shown in the examples is rarely useful 66 99 IS If L is written in a prototype the will often be referred to as the L number Similarly the in H may be called the H number and so on for any other letter If a scale factor is applied to any axis then it will be applied to the value of the corresponding X Y Z A U B V C W word and to the relevant I J K or R words when they are used 7 7 1 Rapid Linear Motion G00 a For rapid linear motion program GO X Y Z A where all the axis words are optional except that at least one must be used The GOO is optional if the current motion mode is GO This will produce coordinated linear motion to the d
279. xis ending where X 1 0 Y 1 6 and Z 0 9 with its center offset in the X direction by 0 3 units from the current X location and offset in the Y direction by 0 4 units from the current Y location If the current location has X 0 7 Y 0 7 at the outset the center will be at X 1 0 Y 1 1 If the starting value of Z is 0 9 this is a circular arc otherwise it 1s a helical arc The radius of this arc would be 0 5 The above arc in Absolute IJ mode would be Gly G02 xX1L 0 YLl 6 11 0 JL 1 20 9 In the center format the radius of the arc 1s not specified but 1t may be found easily as the distance from the center of the circle to either the current point or the end point of the arc 7 7 4 Dwell G04 For a dwell program G04 P This will keep the axes unmoving for the period of time in seconds specified by the P number It is an error if the P number is negative 7 7 5 Coordinate System Data Tool and Work Offset Tables G10 See details of tool and work offsets for further information on coordinate systems To set the offset values of a tool program G10 L1 P X Z A where the P number must evaluate to an integer in the range 0 to 255 the tool number and offsets of the tool specified by the P number are reset to the given The A number will reset the tool tip radius Only those values for which an axis word is included on the line will be reset The Tool diameter cannot be set in this way To set the coordinate values for the
280. y fixture oooccccocccncnccncnncononcnnnnno 7 21 G61 set exact stop mode oooccoocccconccnonocnnonocnnnos 7 21 G64 set constant velocity mode cc eee 7 21 G68 define coordinate system rotatl0N o 7 21 G69 Clear coordinate system rotation 006 7 21 G73 high speed peck drilling canned cycle 7 21 pullback DRO orar ste iuss 7 22 G80 cancel modal MOTION occccoccncnocnnoncnnnnos 1 22 G81 drilling canned cycle co oooccccnocn o 7 23 G82 drilling with dwell canned cycle 7 24 G83 peck drilling canned cycle 7 24 G85 boring and reaming canned cycle 7 25 G86 boring with dwell canned cycle 7 25 G88 boring manual retract canned cycle 7 25 G89 boring with dwell and retract cycle 7 25 G90 absolute distance MOde cccceeeeeee ees 7 26 G91 incremental distance mode 006 7 26 G92 workpiece offsets interaction with parameters coooccccoccnnononnnns 7 26 E san 5 ius cts aran a E NT 7 26 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 30 G93 feedrate inverse time oooocccooccncnncnnonncnonos 7 27 G94 feedrate units per minute c cece 7 27 G98 canned cycle return level LC 6 6 I renee Bea T Ore A N 7 27 G99 canned cycle return level O A N 7 27 G code TWA NIVEL that A II be alten 4 6 G code display co
281. yday running you can now set any surface to be Z 0 0 Just put the probe tip above the surface that 1s to be Z 0 0 and click Move and Set Work Offset This is the best way to set the Z work offset if the probe is in the spindle for setting X and Y too Setting a Tool or Z Surface The other pane on the Z probing screen is used with the tool setter It is shown in figure 8 15 Here there are three quantities and provided two are know the third can be quickly set The height of the tool setter sensor is essentially a constant so needs to be put into the DRO once after each installation or upgrade of the Control Software We first describe setting the sensor height e Put the master tool in the spindle and put its number in the Tool DRO 30635 Rev C3 1 8 7 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 8 2 2 3 Machine upgrades and configuration e Touch it on a flat Z surface like the table of tooling plate and set the current work offset so Z 0 0 sections 6 2 and 6 3 give a range of methods e Jog the master tool so it is above the sensor Tests its wiring by depressing the top and checking that the Test Probe before move LED lights and click the Setup Sensor Height button This will set the persistent DRO recording the sensor height To set tool lengths in the tool table you work as follows e Select the master tool Touch a Z z surface with the master tool and Doy E i set work offset so Z 0 0 as e ur above a e Put the number of the
282. you in appropriate directions 30635 Rev C3 1 2 3 Using Tormach PCNC 1100 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 3 Preparation Receiving Unpacking and Checking Shipment Moving the Crate The PCNC 1100 is supplied on a standard pallet and can be offloaded from a truck with a tailgate lift and moved on smooth surfaces using a hydraulic pallet jack This makes delivery very economical figure 2 3 Remove the crate top and sides with care as the axis drive stepper motors are in vulnerable places figure 2 4 The crated system weighs less than 1300 Ibs 600 kg nevertheless it requires mechanical handling to move it over rough ground and to lift it onto the stand Tormach advises you to employ the services of a specialist rigger if the machine has to be moved in situations where the pallet lifter cannot be used or where there is no crane to lift the machine onto its stand It is possible to improvise using a small trailer a portable engine crane and similar tools if there is no alternative but this risks injury to you and damage to the machine Uncrating and Inspection After uncrating you should check the contents against the parts listed on the packing slip and inspect the machine for any damage incurred during transit so any claims can be made within the carrier s deadline Assembling Y axis Drive The PCNC is supplied with the Y axis drive motor mechanically disconnected You are advised to mount it before attempting to

PCNC1100 User Manual - Website & Collaboration Services

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

PCNC1100 User Manual - Website &amp; Collaboration Services

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

PCNC1100 User Manual - Website & Collaboration Services